The Four Worlds Certification · Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps
Noble Energy® Wellness · For review
The Four Worlds Certification

Certified Practitioner
Noble Energy® Maps

Cohort One · 4 January to 20 September 2027

This is the certification that sits above Four Worlds Mastery. Twelve people learn to read Noble Energy® Maps over eight months, and you teach all of it. At the end a graduate can read a person's Maps, write a report to your standard, and give a reading that person can use. Everything is built except four gate lists and your sign-off.

8months
12places
296hours
6gates
$14,997tuition

Two minutes. Read This First tells you what all of this is, what each section holds, and that only one section needs a decision from you. Everything else is here to be read if you want it, and nothing else requires you.

What you are holding, and what needs you.

Read This First

The whole thing in two minutes.

For: Dr. Eleanor


Noble Energy® Wellness · Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps

Version 1 · 6 August 2026 · Supersedes nothing


What this is

This folder holds the plan for Dr. Eleanor's new certification program.

Everything is here. Nothing is missing except four gate lists from Charles and Dr. Eleanor's sign-off.

What the program is, in three sentences

Dr. Eleanor has read Noble Energy® Maps for over fifty years. This program teaches twelve people to read them too, over eight months, and she teaches all of it herself. At the end, a graduate can read a person's Maps, write a report to her standard, and give a reading the person can use.

The numbers

StartsMonday 4 January 2027
GraduatesWeek of 20 September 2027
Places12
Price$14,997, or $12,000 if they already did Four Worlds Mastery
Hours296
Live teachingThree long weekends, all online

What each folder holds

FolderWhat is in it
00 · START HEREThis page, and the whole program on one page
01 · WHAT THE PROGRAM ISWeek by week. The three weekends. The recorded lessons
02 · WHAT STUDENTS DOThe student handbook, homework, practice, and every form
03 · HOW STUDENTS ARE GRADEDThe six tests, the grading, and what happens if someone fails
04 · HOW STUDENTS ENROLLSales page, application form, emails, prices
05 · THE LEGAL DOCUMENTSFor the lawyer. Agreements and the referral rules
06 · HOW WE BUILD ITWhat gets made, by when, and by whom
07 · DECISIONSWhat Dr. Eleanor needs to decide. What the team needs to answer
08 · INTERNAL ONLYFaculty manual, lesson plans, file list, the checking script
09 · RECORDWhy we made each choice, with sources. Kept in case anyone asks later

What Dr. Eleanor needs to do

Read one document: 07 - DECISIONS / Decisions_For_Dr_Eleanor.

It has two parts.

Part B comes first. Eight choices where two answers were both reasonable and we picked one. She may prefer the other.

Part A comes second. Twenty-two things we believe are already hers. She reads and confirms.

About an hour, if she agrees with the first choice in Part B. Longer if she does not, because that one changes the order of the whole program.

Nothing else in this folder needs her.

What is still open

WhatWhoWhen
Four gate listsCharles1 March 2027
Review the agreementThe lawyerBefore 2 November
Someone to build the materialOpen. 830 hours of work with nobody assignedBefore November
Four hours of her on cameraDr. EleanorWhenever the chart class runs

One more thing

Folder 09 · RECORD holds the reasoning behind every choice, with page numbers from her own books. Nobody has to read it. It is there so that if anyone asks in a year why something was decided a certain way, the answer exists.

One Page Summary

The entire program on one page.

For: Dr. Eleanor and the team


What is below

Program structure

Session counts

The twelve required artifacts

The six gates

What the credential confers

What a graduate may not do

Elective, choose one

Pricing

8 sections, about 645 words. This is a long document.

Everything on one page. The printed version is the Certification Checklist.

Duration8 months, January to September 2027
Program hours296 total
Live3 intensives, virtual
Cohort cap12
Tuition$14,997

Program structure

WhenWhatHours
Wk 1–5Module 1 · Four Worlds Mastery10
Wk 7Intensive I · The Instrument. Thu 11:00 AM to Sun 5:00 PM, virtual24
Wk 8–17Practice cycle. Milestones wk 10, 13, 15, 17—
Wk 18Intensive II · The Map24
Wk 19–27Practice cycle. Milestones wk 21, 24, 27—
Wk 28Intensive III · The Reading24
Wk 28–30Portfolio submission, staggered in three windows—
Wk 29–34Assessment window. Graduation week of 20 Sep—
MonthlyLive group call, 2 hours, 7 in total14
OngoingRecorded core content, self-paced30
Instruction and content126

Session counts

LogSessionsHours
Readings received from a peer1212
Readings given to a peer1218
Peer group sessions1212
Practice Interest Group1112.5
Mentor sessions with Dr. Eleanor63
Practicum readings, Tier One510
Practicum readings, Tier Two1045
Portfolio readings322.5
Logged sessions61135
Program total296

30 readings delivered. Plus or minus the elective, 6 to 30 hours.

The twelve required artifacts

Your own Noble Energy® Map, read and written up

Four Worlds Assessment, self, at entry and at exit

Chart Anatomy workbook

Patterns of Orientation workbook

Report Production workbook

Book report on one title from her library

Practice plan, 30 day, 3 month, 12 month

Client agreement, your own, reviewed by faculty

Referral list, built before your first reading

Program review, self-administered

Mentor evaluation, completed by Dr. Eleanor

Elective, one of six

The six gates

1 · Chart literacy. Notation, the eight layers and their windows, the ten printed charts, Foundation Patterns, color coding, the natal wheel. End of Intensive I.

2 · Patterns of Orientation. The sixty-four entries, and why Profile and Lines are not interpreted. End of Intensive I.

3 · Matrix filter and priority. Which Gates form Channels in each World, and correct Channel Priority ordering. End of Intensive II.

4 · Practicum and conduct. All logs complete with the two practicum tiers logged separately, anonymization standard applied, client agreement and referral list in place. Wk 29.

5 · Report portfolio. Three reports marked against the Template Specification by the Program's report marker, countersigned by Dr. Eleanor. Opens wk 27.

6 · Reading portfolio and oral defense. Three recorded readings, each with a written rationale for what was omitted and why. One defended live. Wk 29–34.

What the credential confers

Conduct paid readings of Noble Energy® Maps

Produce and sell reports, and use the designation and mark, under annual license

Directory listing, continuing education, and the practitioner community

Report fulfillment at practitioner rate, optional

What a graduate may not do

Diagnose, treat, or advise on any medical or psychological condition

Represent the work as clinical, psychological, or medical care

Make claims about health outcomes, or read a chart to decide a medical question

Continue a reading once clinical material appears

Read for anyone under eighteen

Refer to a licensed clinician, and tell the person why

Elective, choose one

Advanced astrology paper · Relationship report case study, two charts plus synastry · Longitudinal case study, three subjects · Teach one recorded lesson to the cohort · Facilitate a community practice group · Additional self-study workbook, submitted

Pricing

Certified Practitioner, eight months$14,997
New student · Mastery included as Module 1$14,997
Prior Mastery graduate · credited, starts at week 7$12,000
Paid in full, direct to us$13,497 / $10,500
Seven monthly payments7 × $2,143 / 7 × $1,715
Financing, paid to the lender$14,997 / $12,000

The paid-in-full discount is for direct payment, not financing.

Specialization, after the credential, four niches$3,000–$5,000
Annual renewal, standing and licenseto set

Terminology

Every short code used in these documents.

For: Everyone


The short codes used across these documents, in one place.

If you see a code you do not recognise anywhere in this folder, it is on this page.


The five code families

CodeStands forRunsExample
RCRecorded CoreRC-1 to RC-12RC-5 is the Nine Centers, four hours
HWHomeworkHW-1 to HW-11HW-6 is the book report, due week 16
AArtifact, one of the twelve a student hands inA1 to A12A9 is the referral list, due week 11
I- · II- · III-Intensive session, by intensive and numberI-1 to I-8, and so onIII-6 is the sixth session of the third intensive
B · ADecision, in the Decisions tabB1 to B7, A1 to A22B1 is the sequencing choice

⚠ Note that A does two jobs. A1 to A12 are the artifacts a student hands in. A1 to A22 in the Decisions tab are things for you to confirm. They are never in the same document, but it is worth knowing.


What Recorded Core means

Twelve recorded lessons, thirty hours, watched by a student on their own rather than in a live session.

Each one has a week by which a student should have watched it, and those weeks appear in the spine.

The rule that decided what goes in them: anything that already exists in your material and does not need a live room.

Which is why two things are not in them. Nothing from Intensive II, because that intensive is blocked on the four gate lists. And nothing from Gate 6, because a recording of you explaining a reading is not a recording of a reading.


Terms that mean something specific

TermMeaning here
GateOne of the six things a student has to pass. Also one of the sixty-four I Ching gates. Context tells you which
World GateThe single Gate that identifies a World. 15, 25, 33, 64. Not a count and not a list of members
MatrixThe set of Gates a World contains. The four membership lists are what Charles owes us
Tier One readingLayers, Foundation Pattern, orientation. No Channels. From week 8
Tier Two readingThe full reading, with Channels, priority order and a report. From week 19
DyadA pair of students reading each other
PIGPractice Interest Group. Eleven meetings, grouped by niche
MilestoneA short form a student submits, seven times
Omission rationaleA student's written account of what they chose not to say in a reading, and why. This is what Gate 6 assesses
The eight rehearsalsThe omission question asked fourteen times across the program before it is graded
LayerOne of the eight charts cast from the 88-unit rule
Printed chartThere are ten. Eight layers plus two Integrated Vehicles. Layer and chart are not the same word
PortalA Gate connecting to a different World. Note it meant something else in the Triple Design Matrix, 2000
Solar Minute · Lunar MinuteArcminutes of motion, not clock minutes
Transit imprintAn activated Gate that cannot form a Channel in its World
Subject RosterThe candidate's own private list of who they read, with full names. Never submitted
Subject IDThe program-issued code that links a log entry to a chart and to the Roster, without carrying either

Week by week, the intensives, the recorded lessons.

What Students Learn And When

All 31 weeks.

For: Dr. Eleanor and the team


Version 1 · 6 August 2026


SECTION 2 — THE SPINE, WEEK BY WEEK

Week One begins Monday 4 January 2027. Teaching runs 28 weeks, assessment to week 34, graduation week 38.

Reading the columns: Taught is what is delivered. Due is what a candidate submits. Opens and Closes are the practice structures.

Module 1 · The Four Worlds

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
14 to 10 JanFour Worlds Mastery Week 1 · The Spiritual/Archetypal World, live—Skool classroom opens. RC-1 available
211 to 17 JanMastery Week 2 · The Physical/Biological World, liveMastery Week 1 workbookRC-2 available
318 to 24 JanMastery Week 3 · The Emotional/Angelic World, liveMastery Week 2 workbook—
425 to 31 JanMastery Week 4 · The Mental/Waking World, liveMastery Week 3 workbook—
51 to 7 FebMastery Week 5 · Four Worlds Integrated, liveMastery Week 4 workbook—
68 to 14 FebGroup call 1 · the whole cohort, first time. Introductions, log walkthrough, what to bring to Intensive IMastery Week 5 workbook · Four Worlds Assessment, entry · A1, your own Map, first pass · A2, Four Worlds Assessment, entryAll logs explained, none open

Candidates entering with the Mastery credit join at week 6. Group call 1 is their first contact and the reason it moved here.

Intensive I

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
715 to 21 FebINTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT. Thu 18 to Sun 21 Feb, 11:00 to 5:00 Eastern, virtual. Sessions I-1 to I-8—Gates 1 and 2 assessed Sunday afternoon

Cycle one

WkTaughtDueOpens / Closes
8RC-3, RC-4HW-1 Chart anatomy setPeer dyads open, Tier One. Partners assigned
9—HW-2 Your own Map, full Tier One write-up—
10RC-5 · Group call 2 · first readings debriefMilestone 1Mentor session 1, gated on two completed peer readings
11RC-5 continuedHW-3 Nine Centers drill—
11—A9, referral list, confirmed and datedRequired before any non-peer subject reading
12——Practice Interest Group opens. Niche selected
13—Milestone 2 · HW-4 Patterns of Orientation, ten chartsPracticum Tier One opens. Readings 1 to 5
14RC-6 · Group call 3 · the instrument in useA3, Chart Anatomy workbookPeer groups open
15RC-7Milestone 3 · HW-5 Natal wheel setMentor session 2
16RC-7 continuedHW-6 and A6, book report—
17Group call 4 · what to bring to Intensive IIMilestone 4 · A4, Patterns of Orientation workbook · RC-8 must be watchedPracticum Tier One closes. All five logged

Intensive II

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
183 to 9 MayINTENSIVE II · THE MAP. Thu 6 to Sun 9 May. Sessions II-1 to II-8—Gate 3 assessed Sunday afternoon

Cycle two

WkTaughtDueOpens / Closes
19RC-9HW-7 Matrix filter setPracticum Tier Two opens. Readings 6 to 15 · Peer dyads close
20Group call 5 · first Tier Two debriefHW-8 Channel Priority drillMentor session 3
21RC-10Milestone 5 · A7, practice plan draft—
22RC-11HW-9 Two Tier Two reports submitted for formative comment—
23RC-11 continuedA5, Report Production workbookMentor session 4, with the written half page
24Group call 6 · portfolio briefingMilestone 6 · HW-10 Elective proposal—
25RC-12A8, client agreement draftMentor session 5
26—HW-11 Omission rationale, practice attempt on a completed reading—
27—Milestone 7 · A12, elective · A7, practice plan final · A11, mentor evaluationPortfolio window opens. PIG closes · peer groups close · Practicum Tier Two closes, all ten logged · Mentor session 6

Intensive III and assessment

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
2812 to 18 JulINTENSIVE III · THE READING. Thu 15 to Sun 18 Jul. Sessions III-1 to III-8Portfolio window A, four candidatesSubmission windows assigned at group call 6
2919 to 25 Jul—Gate 4 pack. All logs and consents · A8 final · A9 · A10, program review · A2, Four Worlds Assessment, exit · Portfolio window BGate 4 assessed. Gate 5 marking begins
3026 Jul to 1 Aug—Portfolio window CGate 5 marking continues
31 to 342 to 29 Aug—Oral defenses, scheduled individually across four weeksGates 5 and 6 assessed
329 to 15 AugGraduation—License issued, directory listing, renewal date set

What closes when, at a glance

StructureOpensClosesTotal
Peer dyads, Tier OneWeek 8Week 1912 received, 12 given
Practice Interest GroupWeek 12Week 2711 meetings
Practicum Tier OneWeek 13Week 175 readings
Peer groupsWeek 14Week 2712 sessions
Practicum Tier TwoWeek 19Week 2710 readings
Mentor sessionsWeek 10Week 276, at weeks 10, 15, 20, 23, 25, 27
MilestonesWeek 10Week 277, at weeks 10, 13, 15, 17, 21, 24, 27
Group callsWeek 6Week 277, at weeks 6, 10, 14, 17, 20, 24, 27
PortfolioWeek 27Week 30, in three staggered windows3 readings

Mentor sessions are at least three weeks apart and the first is gated on two completed peer readings, which is the reference pattern adopted exactly.


The Three Intensives

Twenty-four sessions in full.

For: Dr. Eleanor and faculty


What is below

INTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT · Week 7 · 18 to 21 February 2027

I-1 · Body Map, Not Body Graph

I-2 · Your Own Chart, Page by Page

I-3 · The 88-Unit Rule

I-4 · The Five Types

I-5 · The Nine Centers

I-6 · What Is Not Interpreted

I-7 · Patterns of Orientation

I-8 · The Astrology You Need

INTENSIVE II · THE MAP · Week 18 · 6 to 9 May 2027

II-1 · Factor Structure and the Four Worlds

II-2 · The World Matrices

II-3 · Channel Formation and Transit Imprints

II-4 · Portals

II-5 · The 148 Channels and Channel Master

II-6 · Channel Priority

II-7 · Frequency Is Not Priority

II-8 · The Integration Composites

INTENSIVE III · THE READING · Week 28 · 15 to 18 July 2027

III-1 · The Specification as a Standard

III-2 · The Method Rules

III-3 · Synthesize, Never Quote

III-4 · The Astrology Chapters

III-5 · Keys and Action Points

III-6 · Delivering the Reading

III-7 · What You Do Not Say

27 sections, about 4,440 words. This is a long document.

Version 1 · 6 August 2026


SECTION 3 — THE TWENTY-FOUR INTENSIVE SESSIONS

Two sessions a day, four days, two hours each. Sixteen taught hours per intensive.

Day shape. 11:00 opening block, 30 min. 11:30 Session A, 120 min. 1:30 break, 45 min. 2:15 Session B, 120 min. 4:15 integration and what happens next, 45 min. 5:00 close.

The opening block differs by intensive. Intensive I opens on the candidate's own chart, because logs do not open until week 8 and there is no practice to report. Intensives II and III open on field reports.


INTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT · Week 7 · 18 to 21 February 2027

Target: Gates 1 and 2 passable at the close.

I-1 · Body Map, Not Body Graph

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. State the Four Worlds and what each governs. Explain why one World is not enough. Locate the five components of the Mandala of Synthesis®. Derive four from two from one.

Source. Beyond Human Design pp.1 to 3 and p.84. Living From Soul Ch.2 to 6. Astrology Essentials Part I, Sacred Synthesis Components, and Part III with Illustration 4. SOURCED: Astrology Essentials opens with the Mandala, so the frame precedes the mechanics.

Teacher does. Opens with the thesis in her own words: Human Design maps one World and you live in four. Names the two itemised omissions from Beyond Human Design p.2. Draws the Mandala of Synthesis® and names all five components. Walks Yang and Yin, one becomes two becomes four, so the Four Worlds arrive derived rather than asserted.

Students do. Label a blank Mandala with all five components. Write, in one sentence each, what each World governs.

Exercise. Pairs. Each names a client who did everything right and did not change, and says which World the work was done in.

Materials. Mandala handout, blank and labeled. Illustration 4. Four Worlds reference card.

At the end they can. Explain the system's architecture and its derivation to a skeptical colleague without a chart in front of them.

I-2 · Your Own Chart, Page by Page

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. Separate Design from Personality activations. Read gate and line notation. Identify the thirteen planetary glyphs including Chiron.

Source. Human Design & Health, Personality and Design Calculations figure, which sits in the introductory material ahead of the Types chapter. SOURCED. Astrology Essentials Illustration 10. Cosmic Secrets pp.17 to 18 for Chiron.

Teacher does. Puts her own chart on screen and reads the page furniture before any interpretation. Names every glyph. Explains why Chiron is there and is not in Human Design.

Students do. Work on their own chart, generated from the birth data they gave at application. Mark Design and Personality columns. Circle every glyph they cannot name.

Exercise. Individual, then table review. Every candidate holds their own Map on day one, which is the strongest available start and costs nothing.

Materials. Each candidate's own chart, printed and on screen. Glyph reference sheet.

At the end they can. Point at any activation on their own chart and say what it is, without interpreting it.

I-3 · The 88-Unit Rule

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Name the four units. Name the eight layers, their windows and their Worlds. Derive the windows from the rule. State the halving relationship. Distinguish eight layers from ten printed charts.

Source. Science of Human Design p.5, which gives the rule ahead of the Type distribution at p.14. SOURCED. Template Specification §5 and §7. The printed chart, page 2, for the Integrated Vehicles.

Teacher does. Gives the rule: 88 solar degrees, 88 solar minutes, 88 lunar degrees, 88 lunar minutes, before and after birth, where minute means arcminute. Derives three of the four windows at the board from two rates of motion.

⚠ One exception is taught as an exception. 88 lunar arcminutes computes to roughly 160 minutes and the printed layer reads 90. Taught as an open question, not smoothed over.

Students do. Derive the eight windows from the rule and the two rates. Label all ten printed charts on their own Map.

Exercise. Tables race to derive the windows. First correct set explains it back.

Materials. Calculators. Layer naming sheet. Both sample charts.

At the end they can. Derive the eight windows from first principles and name all eight layers with their Worlds.

I-4 · The Five Types

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Name the five Types and their mechanical definitions. State the distribution. Explain how Type differs by layer. State the over-99% finding and what it measures.

Source. Human Design & Health, The Types chapter, which follows the introduction. SOURCED, chapter order. Science of Human Design Table 1.1 p.14 and pp.5, 84. Cosmic Secrets p.16 for the worked layer example.

Teacher does. Defines each Type mechanically. Gives the distribution. Works Cosmic Secrets p.16, a Manifestor in one layer and a Generator in another, on a real chart. Then the over-99% finding: roughly 34% are Manifesting Generators in the Mental/Waking World alone, over 99% in the Integrated Body Map. Stated as what it measures and nothing beyond.

Students do. Determine Type in each of their own eight layers.

Exercise. Tables compare. Whoever has the most Type variation across layers presents it.

Materials. Type definition card. Distribution table.

At the end they can. Determine Type per layer and explain why a one-World Type reading is incomplete.

I-5 · The Nine Centers

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Name and locate all nine. Read definition. Name the four Definition types. State that Center definition does not predict medical conditions. State that only the Mental/Waking and Physical/Biological Worlds carry the Solar Plexus.

Source. Human Design & Health, the Nine Centers chapter with a figure per Center. SOURCED, chapter order. Beyond Human Design p.2 for the medical finding, p.88 for the Solar Plexus, p.89 for intuition requiring Emotional/Angelic integration.

Teacher does. One Center at a time, using her own figures. Then the negative finding, stated plainly: medical conditions occur independently of Center definition, and language that treats an undefined Center as a vulnerability is disempowering.

Students do. Mark defined and undefined Centers in each of their own layers. Identify their Definition type.

Exercise. Scripted client questions. One candidate asks "does my undefined Throat mean I have thyroid problems," the other answers. Rotates through four scripts.

Materials. Nine Center figures. Definition type sheet. Scripted question cards.

At the end they can. Read Center definition across layers and decline a medical inference without losing the client.

I-6 · What Is Not Interpreted

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Explain why Profile carries no inferable interpretation. Explain why Lines are a mathematical artifact. Name what replaces each. Decline to interpret either.

Source. Science of Human Design p.4. Beyond Human Design p.1. Human Design & Health p.124 for Lines and the substitution of the sign with its dwad. Human Design & Health places Profiles and Lines last. SOURCED, chapter order.

Teacher does. Shows that Profile occurs at exactly the regularity the hexagram structure predicts, and that frequency does not vary across populations, so nothing can be inferred. Then the general principle: what is mathematically determined carries no information. Then p.124: the sign with its dwad yields more specific information than Lines do. Names Thyrza Escobar and Pamela Crane for the dwad technique.

⚠ The displacement principle is ASSUMED as a general rule. Both instances are hers. The generalisation is ours and is marked.

Students do. Write the two displacements and their replacements in their own words.

Exercise. Pairs. One plays a Human Design practitioner arguing for Profile. The other holds the finding without dismissing the person.

Materials. Displacement one-pager. Escobar citation.

At the end they can. Explain both displacements and decline both interpretations, with the reasoning and the attribution.

I-7 · Patterns of Orientation

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Locate the Sun's Gate. Read all six fields of a Patterns of Orientation entry. Name the sixteen Foundation Patterns, four variants each, and the six Pattern qualities. Read a Foundation Pattern as printed on a chart.

Source. Patterns of Orientation workbook, sixty-four rows, and its own header: statements for the Sun position and keynote instead of Profile. Template Specification §5 for the six qualities. Both sample charts for printed Patterns. SOURCED by substitution: it arrives immediately after I-6 removed what it replaces.

Teacher does. Reads her own entry aloud, all six fields. Then walks the sixteen Patterns and the four-variant structure resolving to sixty-four. Then reads Foundation Patterns off both sample charts.

⚠ Two open items are named to the room rather than hidden. The printed charts label everything a Foundation Pattern while the workbook distinguishes Foundation, Transitional and Changing. And the sixteen Pattern names are being checked for provenance.

Students do. Read their own entry, all six fields. Read the Foundation Patterns printed on their own chart.

Exercise. Trios. Each reads their own orientation statement aloud. The other two say whether it lands. The person is present, so the reading can be checked against what they already know, which is the whole argument for cohort charts.

Materials. Patterns of Orientation workbook, proofed. Pattern quality card. Own charts.

At the end they can. Read a person's orientation from the Sun's Hexagram, across all six fields.

I-8 · The Astrology You Need

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Read a tropical Placidus natal wheel. Name house rulerships and sign keynotes. Apply the four color coding rules. State why birth time precision matters.

Source. Astrology Essentials Parts II, IV and V, with the color key closing the book. SOURCED, chapter order: the mechanics follow the frame and the color key is last.

Teacher does. Wheel, houses, rulerships, keynotes. Then Part V: two minutes changes the Moon, and the 90-minute Physical layer makes minute-level precision consequential. Then the four color rules.

⚠ Color is taught as ASSUMED. Three palettes exist and none is authoritative. The four coding rules are hers and are taught as fact. The specific World hex values are flagged as provisional.

Students do. Read their own natal wheel. Color a supplied chart against the four rules.

Exercise. Two candidates with birth times two minutes apart compare charts. If nobody qualifies, a constructed pair is supplied.

Materials. Natal wheels for all twelve. Color key. Blank chart for coloring.

At the end they can. Read a natal wheel, apply the color rules, and explain to a client why birth time matters.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Gates 1 and 2 assessed. Peer dyad partners assigned. Tier One protocol issued.


INTENSIVE II · THE MAP · Week 18 · 6 to 9 May 2027

⚠ The four World gate matrices are a named variable throughout: [M-SPIRITUAL] 15 Gates, [M-PHYSICAL] 25 Gates, [M-EMOTIONAL] 33 Gates, [M-MENTAL] all 64.

Every session below is fully specified. The lists drop into the exercises and the answer keys without restructuring anything. Where a list is required, the session says which.

⚠ The order revises Pass 2 and the reason is logical rather than pedagogical. Pass 2 opened with the matrices and closed with factor structure. A candidate cannot filter Gates by World until they know what defines a World, so factor structure comes first. ASSUMED, with that reasoning.

II-1 · Factor Structure and the Four Worlds

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. Name the four factors and their Centers. State the Ajna and Crown dual membership. State the factor to World mapping. Explain the Sacral dual loading and the bridge it creates.

Source. Science of Human Design Tables 6.1 to 6.2 pp.75 to 79 and p.77 for the Sacral. Her April 5 slide, THE FOUR WORLD MATRICES. Her ruling of 5 August: Ajna and Crown are their own factor and also operate with the Sacral, the G/Self and the Throat.

Teacher does. Presents the four factors with loadings. Explains dual membership for Ajna, Crown and the Sacral. Gives the factor to World mapping and the gate counts, 15, 25, 33, 64. Explains the Sacral connecting the Spiritual/Archetypal and Emotional/Angelic Worlds.

Students do. Build the four factors from a supplied loading table. Map each to its World.

Exercise. Tables assemble the four Worlds from the nine Centers, unaided, then check against her table.

Materials. Loading table. Four World Matrices slide. Factor card.

At the end they can. State what defines each World in terms of Centers, factors and gate count.

Variable needed. None. This session teaches why the counts are what they are.

II-2 · The World Matrices

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. State the matrix rule. Determine, for a given layer, which activated Gates can form a Channel in that World and which cannot.

Source. Template Specification §7: each World reads only the Gates of its own matrix, Channels form only within a World whose matrix carries both Gates, and activated Gates outside a World's matrix are read as transit imprints.

Teacher does. States the rule. Issues the four lists. Works one layer of a supplied chart, marking every activated Gate as in-matrix or out.

Students do. Filter three supplied layers against the lists. Then filter their own eight layers.

Exercise. Individual, timed, against an answer key.

Materials. ⚠ [M-SPIRITUAL], [M-PHYSICAL], [M-EMOTIONAL] as printed reference cards. Answer keys for three worked layers.

At the end they can. Filter any layer against its World's matrix.

Variable needed. All three lists, plus keys derived from them.

II-3 · Channel Formation and Transit Imprints

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Form Channels within a World. Identify activated Gates that cannot form a Channel. Read those as transit imprints.

Source. Template Specification §7. CAPTURE: transit imprints exist as one sentence, unconscious predisposing perceptions, and need her expansion.

Teacher does. Forms Channels on a worked layer. Then the disposal rule: what happens to every activated Gate that cannot complete. In most layers that is the majority of them.

⚠ This is the thinnest source in the whole program. One sentence. Until it is captured, the session teaches the rule and states plainly that the interpretive treatment is under development.

Students do. Form all Channels in their own eight layers. List every leftover Gate per layer.

Exercise. Pairs check each other's Channel formation and imprint lists.

Materials. Matrix cards. Channel formation worksheet, eight layers.

At the end they can. Form Channels correctly and account for every activated Gate that does not.

Variable needed. All three lists.

II-4 · Portals

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Define a Portal. Identify Portals on a chart. Explain how Portals produce 148 Channels from 36.

Source. Beyond Human Design p.3 and the 34-57 worked example. ⚠ Glossary item: Portal means something different in the Triple Design Matrix, 2000. The 2024 meaning is current and both are taught so nobody is confused later.

Teacher does. Works 34-57 in full. Then shows how a Gate whose partner sits outside its World's matrix behaves.

Students do. Identify every Portal across their own eight layers.

Exercise. Tables build the arithmetic from 36 to 148 and check it against the book.

Materials. 34-57 worked example. Matrix cards. Portal worksheet.

At the end they can. Identify Portals and explain the 148.

Variable needed. All three lists.

II-5 · The 148 Channels and Channel Master

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Navigate the 148 entries. Use Channel Master's conditional structure. Match an interpretation to the World a Channel is active in. Proceed from the primary source when Channel Master has no block.

Source. Beyond Human Design, 148 entries, primary. Channel Master, 278 conditional blocks, secondary cross-reference. Template Specification §7: synthesize, never quote either.

Teacher does. Reads one Channel across three different World configurations from Channel Master. Then Channel 5-15, the only Channel carrying all fifteen configurations, because Gates 5 and 15 are the only pair present in all four matrices. Then 19-49, which has seven for the same reason.

⚠ Coverage is uneven and taught as such. Most Channels have three to six blocks. A candidate who draws an uncovered configuration works from Beyond Human Design, and that is a competency rather than a failure.

Students do. Read three of their own Channels, matching each to its World. One deliberately chosen where no block exists.

Exercise. Tables take the same Channel in four Worlds and compare their four readings.

Materials. Beyond Human Design. Channel Master. Coverage map showing which configurations have blocks.

At the end they can. Interpret a Channel in the language of the World it is active in, and handle a gap.

Variable needed. All three lists, for the World matching.

II-6 · Channel Priority

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Order a layer's Channels by Channel Priority. Name Channels completing only across layers or only in integration.

Source. Channel Priorities, forty-one entries, columns D and E. Template Specification §7: always name Channels that complete only across layers or only in integration, because these are frequently the person's highest priority energies.

Teacher does. Issues the sheet and explains how to read it. Orders a full chart live.

Students do. Order their own Channels across all eight layers.

Exercise. Individual, against a key.

Materials. Channel Priorities sheet, printed. Ordering worksheet.

At the end they can. Produce a correctly ordered priority list for any chart.

Variable needed. None.

II-7 · Frequency Is Not Priority

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Judge priority independently of frequency. Work her Channel 30-41 case.

Source. Her worked example: in the eclipse chart, Channel 30-41 appears in all eight layers and is the lowest priority Channel across all priorities, ranking forty-one of forty-one.

Teacher does. Presents 30-41 in all eight layers, invites the room to call it the dominant theme, then gives the ranking. This is the single most likely place a self-taught reader goes wrong and the session is built around that.

Students do. Four constructed cases where frequency and priority diverge.

Exercise. Pairs. One argues from frequency, the other from priority. Then swap.

Materials. The eclipse chart. Four constructed cases with keys. Priorities sheet.

At the end they can. Explain to a client why the thing appearing everywhere is not the thing to work on.

Variable needed. None.

II-8 · The Integration Composites

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Name the five composite Integration Channels. Explain why they rank above all thirty-six standard Channels. Identify them on a chart.

Source. Channel Priorities, where 10-57-34-20, 10-34-20, 20-57-34, 20-34, 10-57-34 and 10-34 occupy the top six ranks. Science of Human Design p.77 for the Sacral dual loading.

⚠ CAPTURE. The ranking exists and the rationale does not. Until captured, the session teaches the ranking as fact and the reasoning as her documented reading of the Sacral dual loading, marked as our reconstruction.

Teacher does. Shows the top of the priority sheet. Connects the composites to the Sacral bridging the Spiritual/Archetypal and Emotional/Angelic Worlds.

Students do. Identify any composites in their own chart. Those without any pair with those who have.

Exercise. Trios. Read one composite for its holder, present, and check it against what they know about themselves.

Materials. Priorities sheet. Composite reference card.

At the end they can. Identify and read the Integration composites, and say why they come first.

Variable needed. None.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Gate 3 assessed. Tier Two protocol issued. Practicum readings 6 to 15 open.


INTENSIVE III · THE READING · Week 28 · 15 to 18 July 2027

Target: Gates 5 and 6.

III-1 · The Specification as a Standard

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. Name all nine report sections in order. Apply the format, typography and language rules. Name the fixed text blocks.

Source. Template Specification §1 to §6 and §8. SOURCED: §2 is the order.

Teacher does. Walks all nine sections against a completed report. Gives the language rules: capitalisation, bolding, trademark placement, hyphenation. Names the Teaching Notes.

⚠ One fixed block is void and taught as void. The science paragraph has been withdrawn. Candidates are told it was withdrawn and why, because a graduate holding an old Specification would keep publishing it.

Students do. Audit a supplied report against the nine sections and the rules. Twelve deliberate errors are planted.

Exercise. Individual audit, then table comparison of what each found.

Materials. Template Specification, current version. Completed model report. Audit report with planted errors and a key.

At the end they can. Say whether a report meets the standard, and where it does not.

III-2 · The Method Rules

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. Execute §7 end to end. Compute each layer's Channels, pair prenatal with postnatal correctly, filter against the matrix, order by priority, name integration-only Channels, confirm Sun and Moon correspondences.

Source. Template Specification §7. SOURCED.

Teacher does. Works a chart from raw activations to an ordered, World-matched Channel list, narrating every rule as she applies it.

Students do. The same, on a supplied chart, against a key.

Exercise. Timed, individual. This is Gate 5's technical content and the drill is the assessment in rehearsal.

Materials. Supplied chart. §7 checklist, which is also Raz's marking checklist. Answer key.

At the end they can. Execute the method rules on any chart and check their own work against the checklist a marker will use.

III-3 · Synthesize, Never Quote

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Produce a Channel description from the primary source with no verbatim overlap.

Source. Template Specification §7: synthesize from Beyond Human Design using Channel Master as secondary, and never quote either. SOURCED: §7 places this before the astrology sections.

Teacher does. Takes one Channel entry and rewrites it three ways at three registers, showing what survives and what must change.

Students do. Synthesize four Channel descriptions. Submitted and scored for verbatim overlap.

Exercise. Pairs swap and mark each other's for overlap against the source.

Materials. Beyond Human Design. Channel Master. Overlap scoring sheet, which is a BUILD item.

At the end they can. Write a Channel description that is theirs and is faithful.

III-4 · The Astrology Chapters

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Produce the natal structure, house rulership, dwad and current sky sections. Identify eclipses in the prenatal and postnatal Solar windows and keep degrees approximate unless certain.

Source. Template Specification §2 and §7. Astrology Essentials Parts II, IV, V. Human Design & Health p.124 for the dwad. Escobar and Crane credited.

⚠ BUILD. The dwad technique has a published external derivation and her own treatment beyond p.124 is not located. Taught against Escobar, credited, and marked as ASSUMED until she supplies her own.

Teacher does. Produces each astrology section live. Derives a dwad. Locates the eclipse thread.

Students do. Produce all four astrology sections for one chart.

Exercise. Individual, then compared against her worked version.

Materials. Ephemeris access. Dwad reference. Eclipse tables for the cohort's birth years.

At the end they can. Produce every astrology section the Specification requires.

III-5 · Keys and Action Points

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Select from the full ranked set what a person can act on. Produce about six Keys to Empowerment and about six Action Points.

Source. Template Specification §2, which closes with them. Beyond Human Design, where every one of the 148 entries carries both. SOURCED by position.

Teacher does. Takes a forty-item priority list and reduces it to six, saying out loud what she is discarding and why.

Students do. Reduce a supplied forty-item list to six Keys and six Action Points, with a written reason for each discard.

Exercise. Tables compare their six. Divergence is the lesson.

Materials. Supplied priority list. Keys and Action Points format sheet.

At the end they can. Produce Keys and Action Points a person can act on this week.

III-6 · Delivering the Reading

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Identify which World a person is speaking from and answer in it. Run the chart, close it, and enter the session on the person. Deliver Stop, Observe, Align. Acknowledge rather than claim to understand.

Source. Beyond Human Design p.3. Four Worlds Mastery Weeks 1 to 4. The Soul Knows slide 7 for Stop, Observe, Align. Brugh Joy credited for acknowledgment. David Grove credited for Clean Language.

⚠ CAPTURE, and it is the whole of the credential. Three transcript instances have her running the chart, closing it, and going to the person, and none explains it. This session is built around recorded footage of her doing it. Until that exists, the session is a live demonstration by her and cannot be delivered by anyone else.

Teacher does. Delivers a full reading to a volunteer, in front of the room, with the chart closed for the first ten minutes.

Students do. Watch, then debrief what she did in those ten minutes.

Exercise. Trios. Reader, receiver, observer. Chart closed for the first ten minutes. Observer logs every point where the reader reached for the chart.

Materials. Recorded reading, CAPTURE. Observer log sheet. Clean Questions card, Grove credited.

At the end they can. Open a reading on the person rather than on the chart.

III-7 · What You Do Not Say

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Recognize clinical material. Stop the reading. Refer, and say why. Decline to diagnose without losing the client. Decline to consult the chart when direct Knowing is available.

Source. The Referral Protocol, in full. CAPTURE for her handling of the moment. Three transcript instances for the refusal.

⚠ The Referral Protocol is drafted against external professional standards and not from her corpus, because her threshold is a licensed psychologist's threshold and a graduate's must be more conservative. Taught as standard of care, attributed as such.

Teacher does. Works the three referral categories. Then the refusal: a moment where she declines to look at the chart because she already Knows, and what told her.

Students do. Eight scripted scenarios, four requiring referral and four requiring only a stated boundary.

Exercise. Pairs, scripted. Then each writes their own referral list and has it checked.

Materials. Referral Protocol. Eight scenario cards. Referral list template. Recorded refusal, CAPTURE.

At the end they can. Recognize the line, stop, refer, and explain the boundary without losing the person.

III-8 · The Omission Rationale

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Write a rationale for what was left out of a reading and why. Defend it.

Source. No source. This is the assessment instrument. BUILD. SOURCED by position: it is the last thing taught, and it is the credential.

Teacher does. Takes the reading she delivered in III-6 and writes the omission rationale for it in front of the room. Names everything she saw and did not say, and the rule she was following each time.

Students do. Write the omission rationale for the reading they gave in III-6's exercise.

Exercise. Pairs. Each reads their rationale aloud. The partner asks, once, why that thing was left out. The answer is the assessment in miniature.

Materials. Omission rationale form and rubric, both BUILD. Their III-6 observer logs.

At the end they can. Account for their own restraint in writing, which is what Gate 6 assesses.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Portfolio requirements issued. Defense scheduling. Gate 4 pack due week 29.


The Recorded Lessons

Twelve lessons, thirty hours.

For: The team


Version 1 · 6 August 2026


SECTION 4 — THE TWELVE RECORDED CORE MODULES

Thirty hours, self-paced, in the Skool classroom. Everything tagged EXISTS that does not need a live room.

Nothing from Intensive II is here, because it is blocked. Nothing from Gate 6 is here, because a recording of her explaining a reading is not a recording of a reading.

#ModuleHrsContentsSourceWatch by
RC-1The Four Worlds and the Body Map3The four Worlds and what each governs. Body Graph is not Body Map. The two omissions from Human Design. The Integrated WorldLiving From Soul Ch.2 to 6. BHD pp.1 to 3, 84. Mastery Wks 1 to 5Week 1
RC-2Chart anatomy3Design and Personality. Gate and line notation. The thirteen glyphs. Chiron and why it is thereHD&H, Personality and Design Calculations. Astrology Essentials Illus. 10. Cosmic Secrets pp.17 to 18Week 2
RC-3The 88-unit rule and the eight layers2The four units. The eight layers, names and windows. The halving. Eight layers against ten printed chartsSoHD p.5. Spec §5 and §7. Chart page 2Week 8
RC-4The Five Types2Mechanical definitions. The distribution. Type by layer. The over-99% finding and what it measuresHD&H. SoHD Table 1.1 p.14, and pp.5, 84. Cosmic Secrets p.16Week 8
RC-5The Nine Centers4One Center at a time, her figure for each. Definition and the four Definition types. Center definition does not predict medical conditions. Only Mental/Waking and Physical/Biological carry the Solar PlexusHD&H, Nine Centers chapter. BHD pp.2, 88, 89Week 11
RC-6The Mandala of Synthesis®2All five components. Yang and Yin, one becomes two becomes four. The 384 correspondence, with her own caveat attachedAstrology Essentials Parts I and III, Illus. 4 and 5. BHD p.3Week 14
RC-7The wheel, houses and keynotes4Tropical Placidus. The twelve houses. Rulerships. Sign keynotes. Significant years by planetary cycleAstrology Essentials Parts II and IV, Illus. 7, 8, 10Week 16
RC-8Precision, and the color system2Why two minutes changes the Moon. The 90-minute layer. The four color coding rulesAstrology Essentials Part V and the color keyWeek 17
RC-9Patterns of Orientation3The sixty-four entries, all six fields. The sixteen Foundation Patterns, four variants, six qualities. Trigram imagesThe Patterns of Orientation workbook, proofedWeek 19
RC-10The displacements1Profile as a mathematical artifact. Lines as a mathematical artifact. The sign with its dwad. Escobar and Crane creditedSoHD p.4. BHD p.1. HD&H p.124. Astrology Essentials bibliographyWeek 21
RC-11The Template Specification3All nine sections in order. Format, typography, language rules. Teaching Notes. The fixed blocks, and the one that was withdrawn and whyThe Specification, current versionWeek 23
RC-12Conduct1Anonymization. The logs. The referral protocol. Disclaimers. The license and what it does not permitHer TDM case precedent. 01a. The Referral Protocol. The Participant AgreementWeek 25
Total30

Watch-by dates place RC-1 and RC-2 inside Module 1, which is why the first six weeks carry 5 hours of recorded content and only 3.5 hours a week overall.

⚠ RC-5 and RC-7 are four hours each and both are straight book chapters. They are the two to produce first, and they are the two where a faculty member other than her can present the material because the figures do the teaching.

⚠ RC-11 must carry a version number on screen. A graduate holding an old Specification would keep publishing a withdrawn claim, and the license obliges them to operate on the version in force.


The handbook, homework, practice and forms.

Student Handbook

The whole program in your own voice.

For: Students, and you

Not simplified, deliberately. This is your register.

What is below

What this credential is

What it confers

What it does not confer

The eight rehearsals

Honor and conduct

Scope of practice, stated once and in full

THE REFERRAL PROTOCOL, IN FULL

The standing rule

Where the line sits

Category one · Stop the session

Category two · Refer before continuing the work

Category three · Hold the boundary and continue

Before you see anyone

Records

Mandatory reporting

Answering honestly is safe, and here is why that matters

Module 1 · The Four Worlds

Intensive I

Cycle one

Intensive II

Cycle two

Intensive III and assessment

What closes when, at a glance

Gate 1 · Chart literacy · End of Intensive I

Gate 2 · Patterns of Orientation and the displacements · End of Intensive I

Gate 3 · The matrices and priority · End of Intensive II

41 sections, about 9,205 words. This is a long document.

Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps

Cohort One · 4 January to 20 September 2027

Noble Energy® Wellness · Eleanor Haspel-Portner, Ph.D.


Welcome.

You are about to spend eight months learning to do the one thing I have never taught outside my own practice.

I have been reading these Maps for over fifty years.

This is the first time I am teaching someone else to read them.

Everything in this handbook exists to get you from understanding the Four Worlds to reading them in another person.

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor


CONTENTS

1. What this credential is, and what it is not

2. The eight rehearsals

3. Honor and conduct

4. Scope of practice, and the referral protocol

5. The spine, week by week

6. The six gates

7. Peer dyads

8. Peer groups

9. Your Practice Interest Group

10. Your six mentor sessions

11. The seven milestones

12. Your homework

13. The twelve artifacts

14. The elective

15. Every log and form

16. The client agreement template


1, 2, 3 AND 4

What this credential is

An eight-month professional certification in reading Noble Energy® Maps.

It certifies one thing.

That you can read a person's Noble Energy® Maps, produce a report to Dr. Eleanor's own standard, and deliver a reading the person can act on.

The Map is the instrument.

The person is what you are reading.

Everything in this document exists to get you from one to the other.

What it confers

Conduct paid readings of Noble Energy® Maps.

Produce and sell reports, and use the designation Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps, and the certification mark, under an annual license.

A listing in the practitioner directory.

Continuing education, and the practitioner community.

Report fulfillment at practitioner rate, if you would rather deliver readings than produce reports.

What it does not confer

This certification confers no clinical, psychological, medical or counseling license, and you will not be a licensed clinician by holding it.

A certified practitioner does not diagnose, treat, or advise on any medical or psychological condition.

A certified practitioner does not represent this work as clinical, psychological, or medical care.

A certified practitioner does not make claims about health outcomes, and does not read a Map to decide a medical question.

A certified practitioner does not continue a reading once clinical material appears.

A certified practitioner does not read for anyone under eighteen.

A certified practitioner does not teach or certify anyone else in this method.

And a certified practitioner refers to a licensed clinician when clinical material appears, and tells the person why.

⚠ On minors. Dr. Eleanor's work with children is written for their parents, and she is a licensed clinical psychologist. You will not be. Reading for a child, and telling a parent what you see about that child's inner life, sits closest to the clinical line, the person being read cannot consent, and the person receiving it is making decisions about somebody else's development. Reading for minors requires the Parents and Children specialization, which is separate training against a separate standard.

The eight rehearsals

One question appears eight times in this program before it is assessed. That repetition is the pedagogy and it is not redundancy.

The question is: what did you choose not to say, and why.

#WhereWeek
1The last five minutes of every Tier One reading. Chart closed, and you ask what you missedFrom 8
2Every Tier Two reading, in the omission noteFrom 19
3 to 9Every milestone submission, all seven10, 13, 15, 17, 21, 24, 27
10Peer group sessions 9 and 1022 and 24
11Mentor session 4, written up as a half page23
12HW-11, a full omission rationale on a completed reading26
13Mentor session 6, on a portfolio draft27
14Intensive III session 8, where you write one in the room28
—Gate 6, where it is assessed31

Why so many times. Anyone can be taught to say more. What separates a practitioner from someone who has read the books is knowing what to leave out, and that is a judgment rather than a technique. A judgment is built by making it repeatedly and being asked to account for it, which is why it appears from week eight rather than in the last month.

Honor and conduct

Six expectations. All six come from her own fifty years and they are the basis on which certification can be revoked.

Trust the person's own process more than any external authority, including hers. Living From Soul, preface, and Cosmic Secrets p.8. You are not being trained to be an authority over anyone.

Do not label. Not shyness, not defiance, not any of them. What a chart shows is how energy is designed to move, and a label closes what a reading is meant to open.

Facilitate change without undermishing self-esteem or core being. People give their power away to esoteric and traditional teachers. Do not accept it when it is offered.

Your chart is the cohort's material, and so is everyone else's.

Your dyad partner reads your chart.

In a peer group, your chart is read only when you are in the room.

Nobody's chart is read or discussed while they are absent, including yours.

That is not only a privacy rule. A reading you are present for is a reading you can correct, and that is the reason we work from the cohort's own charts rather than from strangers'.

Anonymize, always. Initials only. Birth date, birth time and birth place never published, quoted or reproduced in any form. No description of personal circumstances. This applies to your peers, your practice subjects, and your clients equally.

Refuse the reading when the instrument is not what is needed. She runs a chart, closes it, and does not look at it again until she is with the person, and sometimes does not look at it at all. That is a competency here, not an eccentricity.

Credit what is not hers. Clean Language and Clean Space to David Grove. Acknowledgment to Brugh Joy. The dwad technique to Thyrza Escobar and Pamela Crane. Once, prominently, and then reference freely.

Scope of practice, stated once and in full

Dr. Eleanor is a licensed clinical psychologist.

You will not be.

She may say things about what a chart shows that you may not, and the difference is a license rather than a level of skill.

Where the line falls is Domain D of the competency framework, it is one of the four criteria every reading is marked against, and it is the whole of Gate 6's hardest requirement.

If you are already licensed in your own jurisdiction, that license is yours and this certification does not extend it, narrow it, or interact with it. You practice under your license when you are practicing under your license, and under this one when you are reading Maps.

THE REFERRAL PROTOCOL, IN FULL

⚠ This protocol is not drawn from Dr. Eleanor's corpus. It is drafted against general helping-profession scope norms, because her own threshold is a licensed clinical psychologist's threshold and yours must be more conservative. She has reviewed it as a clinician. It is standard of care, not doctrine.

The standing rule

You are not a licensed clinician.

Your work is to read a person's Noble Energy® Maps and help them recognize what their design shows them.

Your work is not to assess, diagnose, treat, or manage any condition.

When clinical material appears, your competence is recognizing it and connecting the person to someone qualified, and nothing further.

Where the line sits

A conservative line is the correct line.

You will sometimes refer someone who did not need it, and that error costs a conversation.

The opposite error costs more, and it is the error a practitioner makes when they feel capable.

Feeling capable is not the test. The test is whether you hold a license.

Category one · Stop the session

Stop the reading, address only what is in front of you, and connect the person to emergency or crisis support before the session ends.

Any indication that the person intends to harm themselves.

Any indication that the person intends to harm someone else.

Any indication that a child or a vulnerable adult is being harmed.

Any state in which the person appears to have lost contact with shared reality, including hearing or seeing what others do not, or holding beliefs that cannot be reasoned with.

Any state in which the person does not appear to know where they are or who you are.

What you do. Stay with them. Say plainly that you are concerned and that you want to get them to someone who can help now. In the United States, call or text 988 with them, or help them reach their own clinician, or call emergency services if there is immediate danger. Do not end the call until they are connected or somebody else is with them.

What you do not do. You do not assess how serious it is. You do not ask what they are planning. You do not agree to keep it between the two of you. You do not continue the reading.

Category two · Refer before continuing the work

Complete the session if it is safe to do so, and do not schedule further work until support is in place.

Active symptoms of a diagnosed condition the person is not currently in treatment for.

Trauma material surfacing with physical distress, dissociation, or loss of the thread of the conversation.

Substance use the person names as out of their control.

Disordered eating, including restriction, purging, or a preoccupation with food or weight that shapes their day.

A recent bereavement, assault, or other acute event.

Any request that you address a medical or psychiatric condition.

Any situation where the person is in someone else's clinical care and is asking you for a second opinion on it.

What you say. That what they have brought is real and important, that it belongs with someone trained for it, and that you would like to help them find that person.

What you do not do. You do not tell them what they have. You do not comment on their treatment, their medication, or their clinician. You do not position the Maps as an alternative to care they are already receiving.

Category three · Hold the boundary and continue

Questions about physical health, symptoms, or diagnosis arising from what a chart shows.

Requests to read a chart to decide a medical question.

Requests to read a child's chart in place of an assessment.

Requests for reassurance that a decision is the right one.

What you say. That the Maps show how their energy is designed to move, and that they do not show what is happening in their body or what they should decide.

Before you see anyone

A referral list, built before your first non-peer reading and confirmed at week eleven. At least one licensed mental health clinician, one physician, and the crisis number for every jurisdiction where your subjects live.

One named person you can consult. A practitioner does not carry this alone, and the moment to arrange it is not the moment you need it.

A client agreement stating what you do and do not do.

Your own support. Reading people surfaces material in the reader. That is expected and it is not a failure.

Records

Note that a referral was made, to what category of professional, and the date.

Do not record the clinical content.

Mandatory reporting

⚠ This cannot be written as one rule and it is not.

Reporting duties for suspected harm to a child or a vulnerable adult are set by the jurisdiction where you practice, and they differ in who is obliged to report.

In some jurisdictions the duty falls on every adult, regardless of profession or license.

You are responsible for knowing the duty that applies where you practice and complying with it.

Your practitioner agreement requires you to confirm this before your first reading and again at each renewal.

Answering honestly is safe, and here is why that matters

Question six on every milestone asks what you chose not to say.

You will sometimes answer it with something you should have referred instead of withheld.

When that happens, we contact you within two days and we work through the referral protocol with you.

It is recorded against the referral competency, so that we know to teach it again.

It is never recorded against you.

I want you to understand the reason plainly.

The same answer at week ten is a lesson, and at week thirty-one it fails the gate.

If you learn to answer question six thinly, we lose the only instrument that finds it early, and you lose the twenty-one weeks in which it could have been taught.

So answer it honestly, including the answers you are not proud of.

That is the whole point of asking eight times.


5. # THE SPINE, WEEK BY WEEK

Week One begins Monday 4 January 2027. Graduation is the week of 20 September.

Reading the columns: Taught is what is delivered. Due is what a candidate submits. Opens and Closes are the practice structures.

Module 1 · The Four Worlds

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
14 to 10 JanFour Worlds Mastery Week 1 · The Spiritual/Archetypal World, live—Skool classroom opens. RC-1 available
211 to 17 JanMastery Week 2 · The Physical/Biological World, liveMastery Week 1 workbookRC-2 available
318 to 24 JanMastery Week 3 · The Emotional/Angelic World, liveMastery Week 2 workbook—
425 to 31 JanMastery Week 4 · The Mental/Waking World, liveMastery Week 3 workbook—
51 to 7 FebMastery Week 5 · Four Worlds Integrated, liveMastery Week 4 workbook—
68 to 14 FebGroup call 1 · the whole cohort, first time. Introductions, log walkthrough, what to bring to Intensive IMastery Week 5 workbook · Four Worlds Assessment, entry · A1, your own Map, first pass · A2, Four Worlds Assessment, entryAll logs explained, none open

Candidates entering with the Mastery credit join at week 6. Group call 1 is their first contact and the reason it moved here.

Intensive I

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
715 to 21 FebINTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT. Thu 18 to Sun 21 Feb, 11:00 to 5:00 Eastern, virtual. Sessions I-1 to I-8—Gates 1 and 2 assessed Sunday afternoon

Cycle one

WkTaughtDueOpens / Closes
8RC-3, RC-4HW-1 Chart anatomy setPeer dyads open, Tier One. Partners assigned
9—HW-2 Your own Map, full Tier One write-up—
10RC-5 · Group call 2 · first readings debriefMilestone 1Mentor session 1, gated on two completed peer readings
11RC-5 continuedHW-3 Nine Centers drill—
11—A9, referral list, confirmed and datedRequired before any non-peer subject reading
12——Practice Interest Group opens. Niche selected
13—Milestone 2 · HW-4 Patterns of Orientation, ten chartsPracticum Tier One opens. Readings 1 to 5
14RC-6 · Group call 3 · the instrument in useA3, Chart Anatomy workbookPeer groups open
15RC-7Milestone 3 · HW-5 Natal wheel setMentor session 2
16RC-7 continuedHW-6 and A6, book report—
17Group call 4 · what to bring to Intensive IIMilestone 4 · A4, Patterns of Orientation workbook · RC-8 must be watchedPracticum Tier One closes. All five logged

Intensive II

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
183 to 9 MayINTENSIVE II · THE MAP. Thu 6 to Sun 9 May. Sessions II-1 to II-8—Gate 3 assessed Sunday afternoon

Cycle two

WkTaughtDueOpens / Closes
19RC-9HW-7 Matrix filter setPracticum Tier Two opens. Readings 6 to 15 · Peer dyads close
20Group call 5 · first Tier Two debriefHW-8 Channel Priority drillMentor session 3
21RC-10Milestone 5 · A7, practice plan draft—
22RC-11HW-9 Two Tier Two reports submitted for formative comment—
23RC-11 continuedA5, Report Production workbookMentor session 4, with the written half page
24Group call 6 · portfolio briefingMilestone 6 · HW-10 Elective proposal—
25RC-12A8, client agreement draftMentor session 5
26—HW-11 Omission rationale, practice attempt on a completed reading—
27—Milestone 7 · A12, elective · A7, practice plan final · A11, mentor evaluationPortfolio window opens. PIG closes · peer groups close · Practicum Tier Two closes, all ten logged · Mentor session 6

Intensive III and assessment

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
2812 to 18 JulINTENSIVE III · THE READING. Thu 15 to Sun 18 Jul. Sessions III-1 to III-8Portfolio window A, four candidatesSubmission windows assigned at group call 6
2919 to 25 Jul—Gate 4 pack. All logs and consents · A8 final · A9 · A10, program review · A2, Four Worlds Assessment, exit · Portfolio window BGate 4 assessed. Gate 5 marking begins
3026 Jul to 1 Aug—Portfolio window CGate 5 marking continues
31 to 342 to 29 Aug—Oral defenses, scheduled individually across four weeksGates 5 and 6 assessed
329 to 15 AugGraduation—License issued, directory listing, renewal date set

What closes when, at a glance

StructureOpensClosesTotal
Peer dyads, Tier OneWeek 8Week 1912 received, 12 given
Practice Interest GroupWeek 12Week 2711 meetings
Practicum Tier OneWeek 13Week 175 readings
Peer groupsWeek 14Week 2712 sessions
Practicum Tier TwoWeek 19Week 2710 readings
Mentor sessionsWeek 10Week 276, at weeks 10, 15, 20, 23, 25, 27
MilestonesWeek 10Week 277, at weeks 10, 13, 15, 17, 21, 24, 27
Group callsWeek 6Week 277, at weeks 6, 10, 14, 17, 20, 24, 27
PortfolioWeek 27Week 30, in three staggered windows3 readings

Mentor sessions are at least three weeks apart and the first is gated on two completed peer readings, which is the reference pattern adopted exactly.



6. ## THE SIX GATES, WITH RUBRICS

Every rubric is marked against four criteria: technical accuracy, priority judgment, world-congruent delivery, and restraint. Not every gate touches all four, and each rubric says which.

Three bands throughout. Meets, Developing, Not yet. Meets is required to pass. A Developing result carries one further attempt. A Not yet result carries one further attempt and a named remediation.

Gate 1 · Chart literacy · End of Intensive I

Criteria: technical accuracy only.

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
NotationReads Design, Personality, gate and line, and all thirteen glyphs without promptingTwo or three errors, self-corrects when askedCannot separate Design from Personality
The eight layersNames all eight, their windows, and the World of eachNames all eight, confuses two windowsCannot name all eight
Layers and chartsDistinguishes eight layers from ten printed charts, names all three Integrated viewsNames two of three Integrated viewsConflates layers and charts
The 88-unit ruleDerives three windows from the rule unaidedDerives with the rule in front of themCannot derive
Types and CentersDetermines Type per layer, marks definition correctly across eight layersOne layer wrongMore than one layer wrong
ColorApplies all four coding rulesApplies threeCannot apply the Center rule
Natal wheelReads signs, houses, rulerships and keynotesNeeds the keynote sheetCannot locate a ruler

Gate 2 · Patterns of Orientation and the displacements · End of Intensive I

Criteria: technical accuracy, and restraint.

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
The instrumentReads any Gate's entry across all six fieldsReads four fieldsCannot locate the Sun's Gate
Foundation PatternsReads them as printed, names Pattern, variant and qualityNames Pattern and variantCannot read the printed Pattern
The displacementsExplains why neither Profile nor Lines carries meaning, and names what replaces eachExplains Profile, not LinesExplains neither
DecliningDeclines to interpret Profile or Lines when asked, without dismissing the personDeclines, but awkwardly or apologeticallyInterprets when asked
AttributionCredits Escobar and Crane for the dwad techniquePromptedDoes not

⚠ The Declining row is a restraint criterion inside a technical gate, deliberately. A candidate who knows the finding and interprets anyway when a client pushes has not met this gate.

Gate 3 · The matrices and priority · End of Intensive II

Criteria: technical accuracy, and priority judgment.

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
Matrix filterFilters any layer correctly, in-matrix and outOne error across eight layersMore than one
Channel formationForms all Channels correctly and accounts for every leftover Gate as a transit imprintForms Channels, does not account for imprintsForms Channels incorrectly
PortalsIdentifies every Portal and explains the 148Identifies mostCannot define a Portal
Priority orderOrders correctly against the sheet, all eight layersOne transpositionMultiple
Frequency versus priorityGiven a Channel present in all eight layers at low rank, ranks it correctly and explains whyRanks correctly, cannot explainRanks by frequency
Integration compositesIdentifies them and states that they lead the orderIdentifies themMisses them

⚠ Gate 3 cannot be assessed until the four gate matrix membership lists exist. The rubric is complete and the answer keys are derived from the lists.

Gate 4 · Practicum and conduct · Week 29

Criteria: restraint, and completeness. Marked as complete or incomplete, per line.

ItemRequired
Readings received log12 entries, all fields
Readings given log12 entries, all fields, each with what landed and what did not
Peer group log12 entries, leader-signed
PIG log11 entries, plus the niche statement from meeting 11
Mentor log6 entries, her signature, plus the session 4 half page
Practicum Tier One log5 entries, each with a signed consent form
Practicum Tier Two log10 entries, each with a signed consent form and an omission note
Client agreementOwn version, all twelve clauses, clause 4 present and unmodified
Referral listComplete, dated, and dated no later than week 11
AnonymizationNo birth data anywhere in any submitted material. One instance is an incomplete gate
Program reviewSubmitted
ElectiveSubmitted and marked

⚠ The anonymization line is pass or fail on a single instance, because a practitioner who publishes birth data once will do it again.

Gate 5 · Report portfolio · Assessed weeks 29 to 34

Three reports, all nine sections of the Template Specification.

Marked against the Specification by the Program's report marker, and countersigned by me.

Four conditions must hold on every report. All nine sections present. No fabricated content. Synthesis rather than quotation. Priority order correct.

Any one failing is a resubmission of that report, not a partial pass.

Beyond those four, eight rows are marked: layer computation, matrix filter, priority reasoning, World-matched interpretation, Sun and Moon correspondences, the astrology sections, Keys and Action Points, and format and language.

Meets on all eight to pass. One Developing row carries a revision rather than a resubmission.

Gate 6 · Reading portfolio and oral defense · Assessed weeks 29 to 34

Three recorded readings, three omission rationales, one defended live.

Assessed by me.

What I am reading in an omission rationale

This is the part of the credential I care most about, so I will tell you exactly how it fails.

It fails if you tell me nothing was withheld.

A reading in which you said everything you saw is either a reading of a chart rather than a person, or a rationale you did not attempt.

It fails if everything you list is something you forgot.

Things you did not notice at the time are not omissions.

An omission is a choice, and a list of oversights describes something other than restraint.

It fails if you give me no rule.

A withholding explained only by preference, or by how it felt, is not accounted for.

Tell me what you were following.

It fails if you withheld clinical material and offer that to me as restraint.

If you write that you chose not to raise somebody's depression, or what they told you about their drinking, and present that as judgment, you have confused withholding with referring.

The referral protocol asked you to stop and get that person to somebody qualified.

Saying nothing and carrying on is not restraint, and I will not read it as restraint.

It fails if the rationale itself breaks the anonymization standard.

Birth data, a full name, or a description of somebody's circumstances, once, is enough.

And one thing I want you to know about this

The same answer at week ten is a lesson.

At week thirty-one it fails a gate.

That is why I ask you eight times before I assess it, and why nobody is ever penalized for an honest answer at a milestone.

Eight rows are marked: opening on the person, World identification, clean questioning, witnessing, priority delivered, the boundary held, the omission rationale, and the defense.

Meets on all eight to pass. A Not yet on the boundary row or the omission row is a Not yet on the gate, whatever the other six say.

Your portfolio is submitted in an assigned window, week 28, 29 or 30, and windows are assigned at group call 6.

The defense is thirty to forty-five minutes, on one of your three readings, chosen by me. Three questions, and you get them in advance at group call seven, in week 27. Why that reading. What did you leave out. What would you do differently.

A defense is not an ambush.

Pass thresholds, attempts and remediation

PassMeets on every row of every gate
AttemptsTwo further attempts per gate, maximum. The first is included in tuition. A second, where permitted, carries a stated fee. No sooner than two weeks after a result, no later than eight
DevelopingOne revision, on the specific rows named. Not a full resubmission
Not yetOne further attempt, plus a named remediation, which is specific work and not a repeat of the same submission
Gate 5, threshold failureResubmission of that report. Two resubmissions on the same report escalate to Dr. Eleanor
Gate 6, failure on the boundary or omission rowsOne further attempt, on a new reading with a new subject. The failed reading is not revisable, because the judgment being assessed happened in the room
Two further attempts used, gate not satisfiedStatement of completion of coursework. Without a cap the standard becomes a function of persistence rather than competence
Coursework complete, gates not satisfiedStatement of completion of coursework. Not a certification, confers nothing, and does not entitle any use of the mark or designation

Appeals

An appeal is decided by Marvin Portner, M.D., in consultation with Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner and not decided by her.

Lodged in writing within fourteen days of the result, stating which row is disputed and why.

Gate 5 appeals have a genuinely independent chain. Raz marks, Dr. Eleanor countersigns, Marvin decides. Nobody reviews their own decision.

Gate 6 appeals in Cohort One, and the dated remedy

Cohort One condition. She is the sole assessor of Gate 6, so an appeal is Marvin reviewing his wife's decision. Stated plainly rather than presented as independence.

From Cohort Two: a certified graduate co-assesses Gate 6. Graduate assesses, Dr. Eleanor countersigns, Marvin decides. Nobody reviews their own decision, and the chain matches Gate 5's.

That is not a promise invented to close this gap. It is the facilitator pathway already designed into Cohort One's enrollment, which is why the remedy has a date rather than an intention.



7. # SECTION 6 — PEER DYAD PROTOCOL

Twelve readings received and twelve given, weeks 8 to 19. Tier One only. Tier Two readings are practicum, not dyad, and are covered in section 12's practicum log.

Tier One reading, peer-facing

Sixty minutes. Reader and receiver. No third party.

MinWhat happens
0 to 5Reader states what this is and what it is not. Reads the scope statement aloud, verbatim, from the card
5 to 10The doorway question. What would you like to have happen. Nothing else. Credit David Grove
10 to 25The eight layers. Reader names each layer, its window, and what is live in it. Receiver says only whether it lands
25 to 40The Foundation Pattern and the Sun's orientation. Read from the chart and from the Patterns of Orientation entry, all six fields
40 to 50Receiver responds. Reader uses deepening questions only. No explaining, no defending a reading that did not land
50 to 55Reader names one thing to notice this week. One, not three
55 to 60Reader closes the chart and asks: what did I miss

What the reader submits. Reading log entry, plus three lines: what landed, what did not, and what they would do differently.

What the receiver submits. Three lines: what landed, what did not, and one thing the reader did that they would want done again.

⚠ The final five minutes are the whole protocol. A reader who never asks what they missed learns nothing from twelve readings. It is also the first rehearsal of the omission rationale, eighteen weeks before Gate 6.

Tier One reading, subject-facing

For practicum readings one to five, weeks 13 to 17, where the person is not a peer.

Three differences and they are all protective.

The scope statement is longer and it is signed, not read. The subject signs the practice subject consent form before their birth data is collected.

No deepening questions past the first response. A peer knows they are practicing. A subject came for a reading, and a candidate at week 13 is not equipped to follow material that opens up.

The reading stops at forty minutes, and the last twenty are the subject talking and the candidate listening. What the candidate submits includes any moment where the subject raised something the candidate chose not to follow, and why.

⚠ The referral protocol applies from the first subject reading. A candidate has their referral list before practicum opens, which is why Artifact 7 is due at week 25 in draft and confirmed before week 13. That ordering is corrected in the spine.

Tier Two reading, subject-facing

Ninety minutes plus a written report. Weeks 19 to 27, ten of them.

StageWhat happensTime
BeforeChart cast. Matrix filter applied. Channels formed and ordered by priority. Practicum report written, Map chapters only3 hrs
0 to 10Scope statement, signed consent confirmed, doorway question
10 to 25The eight layers and the Integrated Vehicles
25 to 40Foundation Pattern and the Sun's orientation
40 to 65The priority Channels, in order, in the language of the World each is active in
65 to 80Subject responds. Candidate acknowledges rather than explains
80 to 90Chart closed. What did I miss. What did you already know that I did not say
AfterLog entry, plus the omission note0.5 hrs

Total 4.5 hours per Tier Two reading, which is the figure in the reprice.



8. # SECTION 7 — PEER GROUP PROTOCOL

Twelve sessions, sixty minutes, groups of four. Weeks 14 to 27.

Form taken from the reference set. Content is hers.

Standing shape, every session. Ten minutes of practice per person in rotation. The person read gives feedback first, then the observers. Three questions only: what was done well, what could be better, what was missing. A leader is nominated per session to keep time, and it rotates.

#TopicPrepareIn the session
1Opening a readingRC-1. Living From Soul Ch.2 to 6Each person says aloud what they say to a person before a reading begins. Practice the first two minutes only, four times each
2The doorway questionLiving From Soul Ch.11. Clean Questions cardPractice the doorway question and nothing after it. Notice how often the group adds a second question and does not need to. Credit Grove
3Deepening without leadingMastery Weeks 1 and 3Practice the deepening set. Observers count every question that carried an assumption
4Which World is speakingMastery Weeks 1 to 4. Beyond Human Design p.3One person talks about a real difficulty for three minutes. The others call the World, silently, then compare
5Answering in that World's language02a Part OneSame exercise, then the reader answers in the wrong World deliberately, then in the right one. The contrast is the lesson
6Witnessing rather than explainingMastery Week 3Practice on real emotional material. Observers count every explanation offered
7Stop, Observe, AlignThe Soul Knows slide 7Deliver the protocol as scripted, four times each, then unscripted
8Acknowledgment, not understandingMYD 2026-07-16. Brugh Joy creditedPractice acknowledging without claiming to understand. Notice what the receiver does differently
9Declining to interpretSoHD p.4. BHD pp.1, 2. HD&H p.124Scripted client questions on Profile, on Lines, and on an undefined Center as a health problem. Each person answers all three
10What you do not sayThe Referral ProtocolFour scenarios. Two need a boundary stated, two need a referral. Practice both, aloud
11Group choice—Demonstration reading with group feedback, or any skill the group wants again
12Group choice, and close—Each person names the one thing they can now do that they could not in week 14

Output per session. A peer group log line signed by the nominated leader: date, attendance, topic, and one line each on what each person practiced.

⚠ Sessions 1 to 8 build the reading, 9 and 10 build the restraint, 11 and 12 are theirs. That is the reference arc with her content in it, and the placement of restraint at 9 and 10 is ASSUMED. The reasoning is that a candidate cannot practice declining to interpret before they can interpret.



9. # SECTION 8 — PRACTICE INTEREST GROUP PROTOCOL

Eleven meetings, weeks 12 to 27. Eight peer-led at sixty minutes, three faculty-led at ninety. Groups of four to six, selected by niche.

The three faculty-led meetings run to all groups together, which is three sessions rather than nine and is the founder-load fix from the arithmetic run.

Four niches. Parents and Children · Clinicians and Therapists · Relationships · Health and Wellness.

#WkLed byTopicWhat happens
112FacultyIntroduction to the four nichesAll groups together. Each niche introduced with the material in her corpus that serves it. Logistics and questions
213PeersGetting startedChoose meeting times. Nominate a leader per meeting. Decide on recording. Each person says why they chose this niche, what their background is, and what they can offer the others
315PeersWho, specificallyBrainstorm who inside this niche you would work with. Three minutes of silence picturing one person, then share. The more specific the better
417PeersWhat they arrive withWhat does that person come in carrying. What keeps them up. What in the Four Worlds addresses it, and which World it lives in
519FacultyReadings in this nicheAll groups together. She reads for a volunteer from each niche, or one reading is discussed from each
621PeersSpecialty presentations, first halfTwo or three members present their chosen focus for eight minutes, then read a role-played client in it for ten, then five minutes of group feedback
723PeersSpecialty presentations, second halfThe remaining members, same format. At the end each names the focus they are pursuing
824PeersWhat you will offerOne-to-one readings, reports, group work, workshops. At her prices or your own, and what the difference implies
925PeersFinding these peopleWhere they already gather. What they read. Who else serves them. Whether they can pay
1026FacultyReadings, and questionsAll groups together. Second round of demonstration, with the harder questions the groups have accumulated
1127PeersCloseEach says what the group produced. Practice plan checked against it

Output. PIG log line per meeting, plus one artifact at meeting 11: a one-page statement of who they serve, what they work on, and what they offer.

⚠ Meeting 1 moves to week 12 and meeting 5 to week 19, both faculty-led, and both were originally clustered after Intensive II. The arithmetic run moved them. Meeting 5 now falls in the week Tier Two practicum opens, which is the right week for her to demonstrate one.



10. # SECTION 9 — THE SIX MENTOR SESSIONS

⚠ The reference folder is empty. There is no form to extract and this section is built from her constraints and the mechanics already documented.

Thirty minutes each. With Dr. Eleanor. At least three weeks apart. The candidate books each one individually. Audio only, not recorded.

The first is gated on two completed peer readings, which is the one reference pattern that survived, and it is adopted exactly.

#WkForCandidate bringsShe assessesRecorded
110Are you reading the chart or the personTheir first two peer reading logs and both receiver responsesWhether the candidate can hear what the receiver said, or only what they themselves saidOne line: proceeding, or repeat two readings
215The displacementOne reading where a receiver asked about Profile, Lines, or a Center as a health matterWhether they declined cleanly, or hedged, or answeredOne line, plus any competency to revisit
320The first Tier TwoTheir first Tier Two report and the chart it came fromWhether the matrix filter and the priority order are correct, and whether the report says what the priority order impliesOne line, plus a technical note if the filter was wrong
423A reading that did not go wellOne, chosen by the candidate, written up as a half page before the sessionWhether the candidate can locate the failure in their own reading rather than in the personOne line, plus the half page retained as an artifact. The strongest predictor of Gate 6
525The boundaryA moment where clinical material appeared, or, if none has, the closest thingWhether they recognized it, what they did, and whether they would refer nowOne line, plus a referral note if the list is thin
627Portfolio readinessTheir three chosen portfolio subjects and a draft omission rationale for oneWhether the three readings are different enough from each other to demonstrate rangeMentor evaluation completed. This is the Gate 4 artifact

What is recorded and what is not. One line per session in the mentor log, written by her, plus the evaluation at session six. Nothing about the content of a candidate's own material is recorded, which follows her own anonymization standard applied inward.

⚠ Session 4 has no source and is the most important of the six. Bring a reading that did not go well, written up as a half page. The written half page is what makes the session assessable rather than only useful, and it takes the omission rehearsals to eight. The reasoning is that Gate 6 assesses whether a candidate can account for their own restraint, and a candidate who cannot locate a failure in themselves will fail it. ASSUMED, and it is the session I would protect if the count ever drops below six.



11. # SECTION 11 — THE SEVEN MILESTONE SUBMISSIONS

Asynchronous. A form, not a call. Thirty minutes. Reviewed by faculty, not marked.

Weeks 10, 13, 15, 17, 21, 24, 27. Identical every time, deliberately.

The form

1. Readings completed since the last milestone. Received, given, practicum, by number.

2. Hours logged since the last milestone.

3. One thing that improved.

4. One thing that did not.

5. One question for faculty.

6. In a reading this period, what did you choose not to say, and why.

7. Anything you want us to know that these questions did not ask.

Why it is identical every time

Because the point is the series, not the entry. Seven answers to question 6 across eighteen weeks show whether a candidate's judgment is developing, and that cannot be seen in one submission.

And because a form that changes every time takes longer to complete than one that does not, which matters when the whole thing is meant to take thirty minutes.


12. # SECTION 5 — HOMEWORK, ELEVEN ASSIGNMENTS

One named artifact per assignment, submitted in the Skool classroom. Following the reference pattern where homework is a thing rather than a prompt.

#DueTaskDeliverableTimeFeeds
HW-1Wk 8Label every activation on your own chart across all eight layers. Mark Design and Personality. Name every glyphAnnotated chart, eight layers, PDF3 hrsGate 1
HW-2Wk 9Full Tier One write-up of your own Map: the eight layers, your Foundation Patterns, your Sun's orientationWritten reading, 900 to 1,200 words4 hrsGates 1, 2
HW-3Wk 11Nine Centers drill. For six supplied charts, mark defined and undefined Centers per layer and name the Definition typeCompleted drill sheet2.5 hrsGate 1
HW-4Wk 13Read the Sun's orientation for ten supplied charts, all six fields of the Patterns of Orientation entryTen completed entry sheets3.5 hrsGate 2
HW-5Wk 15Natal wheel set. Read three supplied wheels: signs, houses, rulerships, keynotes. Apply the four color rules to oneThree wheel readings, one colored chart3 hrsGate 1
HW-6Wk 16Book report. One title from her library. What it argues, what it establishes that the others do not, and one thing you will do differently1,200 to 1,500 words6 hrsGate 4
HW-7Wk 19Matrix filter set. For four supplied charts, filter every layer against its World matrix, form Channels, list every transit imprintFour completed filter sheets4 hrsGate 3
HW-8Wk 20Channel Priority drill. Order the Channels of three charts. Include the frequency-versus-priority case and say which Channel you would have chosen wronglyThree ordered lists plus a paragraph3 hrsGate 3
HW-9Wk 22Submit two completed Tier Two practicum reports for formative comment. Not gradedTwo practicum reportsAlready counted in the practicumGate 5
HW-10Wk 24Elective proposal. Which of the six, why, and what you will submitOne page1 hrElective
HW-11Wk 26Omission rationale, practice attempt. Take one completed reading and write what you left out and why600 to 900 words2 hrsGate 6

Total: roughly 32 hours, sitting inside the 20 hours of artifacts and the practicum allowance already counted. HW-9 adds no hours because the reports are already required.

⚠ HW-11 is the only homework that rehearses Gate 6. Everything else rehearses a gate with a written standard. This one rehearses judgment, and it is deliberately placed after twenty-five readings rather than before.



13. # SECTION 14 — THE TWELVE REQUIRED ARTIFACTS

Canonical numbering. A1 to A12, in Checklist order.

⚠ The spine in section 2 uses a different numbering and needs aligning to this. Listed at the end of this section.

#ArtifactDueWhat it isSpecification
A1Your own Noble Energy® Map, read and written upWk 6 first pass, Wk 9 fullThe candidate's own Map, read as a Tier One reading and written up900 to 1,200 words. All eight layers named with windows. Foundation Patterns as printed. Sun's orientation, all six fields. One paragraph on what the reading got wrong about you, which nobody else can write
A2Four Worlds Assessment, entry and exitWk 6 and Wk 29Her published instrument, taken twiceLiving From Soul Appendix A, unmodified. Both scored. The exit submission includes three lines on what moved and whether the program caused it
A3Chart Anatomy workbookWk 14Self-study workbook covering RC-2, RC-3, RC-4BUILD. Roughly 24 pages. Notation, Design and Personality, the glyphs, the eight layers and their derivation, Types by layer. One exercise per section, answers at the back
A4Patterns of Orientation workbookWk 17Self-study workbook against the sixty-four-row instrumentBUILD. Roughly 20 pages. The six fields. The sixteen Patterns and four variants. The six qualities. Reading the printed Pattern against the workbook taxonomy, including where they disagree
A5Report Production workbookWk 23Self-study workbook against the Template SpecificationBUILD. Roughly 32 pages. All nine sections. The method rules as a checklist. The same checklist the marker uses at Gate 5
A6Book reportWk 16One title from her library1,200 to 1,500 words. What it argues. What it establishes that the others do not. One thing you will do differently. Not a summary. A summary is a resubmission
A7Practice planWk 21 draft, Wk 27 finalThirty day, three month, twelve monthWho you serve. What you offer. At what price. How you will find them. The niche statement from PIG meeting 11 is the input. Two pages maximum
A8Client agreementWk 25 draft, Wk 29 finalThe candidate's own version of the templateAll twelve clauses. Clause 4 present and unmodified, including that clients must be eighteen or older. Faculty reviewed at Gate 4
A9Referral listWk 11Built before any non-peer subject readingOne licensed mental health clinician. One physician. Crisis number per jurisdiction where subjects live. Dated. The date is checked, not just the presence
A10Program reviewWk 29Self-administered completion auditThe Checklist, line by line, with the candidate's own confirmation against each. Plus three lines on what the program should change
A11Mentor evaluationWk 27Completed by Dr. Eleanor, not the candidateSix session lines. Portfolio readiness judgment. Any competency to revisit. Her signature. The session 4 half page attached
A12ElectiveWk 27One of sixSection 15

14. # SECTION 15 — THE ELECTIVE

One of six. Proposed at week 24, submitted at week 27.

The effort is unequal and this document says so

Range: six to thirty hours. A paper and facilitating a practice group for a term are not the same work and pretending otherwise would either inflate the light options or gut the heavy ones.

Choose on fit, not on cost. The elective is where a candidate does the thing their practice will actually need, and a candidate whose practice needs a workbook should not be pushed into facilitation because the hours match.

⚠ Arithmetic consequence. The 296-hour envelope allocated ten hours to the elective. With a six to thirty hour range, total program hours run from 292 to 316. Stated as 296 plus or minus the elective rather than as a fixed figure.

#ElectiveHoursRequirementsMarking standard
E1Advanced astrology paper~153,000 to 4,000 words on one astrological component of the Maps, beyond Astrology Essentials. Dwads, the eclipse thread, significant years by planetary cycle, or the color systemMeets: advances beyond the prerequisite text, sources cited, and it changes how the candidate reads. Not yet: restates Astrology Essentials
E2Relationship report case study~12Two consenting adult subjects. Both charts. Synastry wheel. Electromagnetic Channels, companionship Gates, Pattern resonance. A report to the Specification's relationship format, and one delivered joint readingMeets: all three relationship layers present, and the joint reading holds both people. Not yet: two individual readings presented together
E3Longitudinal case study~25Three subjects, read three times each across the program, weeks 13 to 27. Nine readings, all logged, counting toward the practicum rather than in addition to it. 3,000 words on what changed and what did notMeets: tracks change over time and distinguishes what the reading caused from what time caused. Not yet: three unconnected readings per subject
E4Teach one recorded lesson to the cohort~8Thirty to forty-five minutes, recorded, on one topic from the recorded core. Slides or figures. Made available to the cohortMeets: accurate, sourced, and a candidate who watched it could do the thing. Not yet: accurate but not teachable
E5Facilitate a community practice group~30One term, minimum eight sessions, four to eight participants outside the cohort. Agendas, attendance, and a two-page report on what the group producedMeets: eight sessions ran, participants stayed, and the report distinguishes what worked from what the facilitator enjoyed. Not yet: fewer than eight sessions, or attendance collapsed without an account of why
E6Additional self-study workbook~6Complete one of A3, A4 or A5 that is not already required of them, or the Keys to Transformational Communication workbook, submitted with all exercisesMeets: complete, exercises attempted rather than filled in. Not yet: incomplete

All six are marked Meets or Not yet. No bands. A Not yet carries one resubmission and the elective may be changed at that point, since the point of the elective is fit.

⚠ E3 counts its nine readings toward the practicum rather than in addition. Without that, E3 is fifty-five hours rather than twenty-five and nobody would choose it. Flagged because it is the only elective that interacts with another requirement.

⚠ E2 requires two consenting adult subjects who are in a relationship with each other, and it is the only elective that requires anyone other than the candidate to agree to something. A candidate proposing E2 at week 24 needs both consents before week 27, which is tight, and the proposal should confirm they are secured.



15. # SECTION 12 — EVERY LOG AND FORM

Ten items. Four exist in draft, six are BUILD.

#FormFieldsStatus
1Tier One reading logDate · reading number · subject initials · peer or practicum · duration · layers read · Foundation Patterns named · what landed · what did not · what I would do differently · what I chose not to sayBUILD
2Tier Two reading logAll of the above, plus: matrix filter applied Y/N · Channels formed · priority order attached · report submitted Y/N · omission noteBUILD
3Peer group logDate · attendance · session number and topic · nominated leader · one line per member on what they practiced · leader's signatureBUILD
4PIG logDate · meeting number and topic · led by · attendance · one line on what the group producedBUILD
5Mentor logDate · session number · what was brought · her one line · any competency to revisit · her signatureBUILD
6Practice subject consent formSubject name and initials · what a Noble Energy® Map is · that the candidate is in training and is not certified · that birth data is never published · that they are identified by initials only · that no fee is charged · that they may withdraw · signature and dateDrafted. Counsel to confirm
7Cohort-peer consentAt application, field 5.6, with the opt-out at 5.7Drafted. Counsel to redline
8Milestone submission formSeven, identical. Readings completed since last milestone · hours logged · one thing that improved · one thing that did not · one question for faculty · what I chose not to say in a reading this period, and whyBUILD
9Referral list formatOne licensed mental health clinician · one physician · crisis number per jurisdiction where subjects live · date built · date last checkedDrafted in the Referral Protocol
10Gate 5 marking checklistSection 7 of the Specification turned into a checkable list. Also issued to candidates in III-2, so they mark their own work against what a marker will useBUILD, and it is on the critical path for Raz

⚠ Item 8 carries the omission question at every milestone. Seven repetitions before Gate 6, in a form that takes thirty minutes. That is the cheapest possible rehearsal of the credential's hardest criterion, and it is the reason the milestone form is not just an attendance record.



16. # ARTIFACT 8 — THE CLIENT AGREEMENT TEMPLATE

Higher priority than the participant agreement, because this document has to contain a template a candidate can adapt. Twelve clause categories, taken as form from the reference template. Every word below is ours or hers.

⚠ DRAFT. For counsel review before it is issued to any candidate. A candidate adapts it and faculty reviews their version at Gate 4.

#ClauseWhat it must state
1Parties and termPractitioner, client, start date, and the number of sessions or the period
2Fee and paymentAmount, when payable, and what it covers. Report and reading priced separately if both are offered
3What the service isA reading of the client's Noble Energy® Maps, and a written report if included
4What the service is notNot clinical, psychological, medical or counseling care. Not diagnosis, treatment or advice on any condition. Not a substitute for care the client is receiving. Clients must be eighteen or older
5Birth dataWhat is collected, that it is required, that it is never published, and how long it is kept
6ConfidentialityEverything the client says, and everything the chart shows, kept confidential as allowed by law
7Anonymization if the reading is usedInitials only, no birth data, no personal circumstances, and only with the client's separate written consent
8ReferralThat the practitioner will stop and refer if clinical material appears, and that this is not a failure of the reading
9RecordingWhether the session is recorded, for what, and the client's right to decline
10CancellationNotice required, by either party
11Limit of remedySole remedy is return of fees paid. No liability beyond that
12SignaturesClient, practitioner, dates. No guardian line. Clients are eighteen or older

Minors, decided

Graduates do not read for anyone under eighteen. Executive decision, not a counsel question.

Why it is the right line. The Soul Knows material is parent-facing, so unpaid practice subjects will include children the moment a template permits it. An unlicensed graduate reading a child's chart and telling a parent what they see about that child's inner life is the highest-exposure act in the credential. It sits closest to the clinical line, the person being read cannot consent, and the person receiving it is making decisions about someone else's development. She is a licensed clinical psychologist with a parent-facing body of work. Her graduates are not, and the gap between them is widest exactly here.

And it becomes a product rather than a prohibition. Reading for minors moves into the Parents and Children specialization, which is already one of the four niches. Additional training, separate standard, priced separately.

Propagated to: clause 4 as fixed unalterable text, clause 12 with the guardian line removed, the Checklist may-not list, and the sales page.

⚠ Clause 4 is the only clause a candidate may not alter. It is issued as fixed text and Gate 4 checks that it is present and unmodified.



End of Layer One.

Homework And Due Dates

Eleven assignments with dates.

For: Students and the team


Version 1 · 6 August 2026


SECTION 5 — HOMEWORK

Eleven assignments. Modeled on the reference set's post-module structure: a short ordered list issued immediately after each intensive, each item with a deliverable and a due week.

#Due wkThe taskDeliverableTimeFeeds
HW-18Label every activation on your own chart across all eight layers. Name every glyph. Mark Design and PersonalityAnnotated chart, eight layers3 hrsGate 1
HW-29Write a full Tier One reading of your own Map: layers, Foundation Pattern, Sun orientation800 to 1,200 words4 hrsGates 1, 2
HW-311For each of the nine Centers, write one line on what defined and undefined mean, and one line on what you will not say about itOne page2 hrsGates 1, 2
HW-413Read the Sun orientation for ten supplied charts, all six fieldsTen short entries3 hrsGate 2
HW-515Read three natal wheels: houses, rulerships, keynotes. Apply the four color rules to oneThree wheel readings, one colored3 hrsGate 1
HW-616Book report on one title from her library. What it changed about how you read1,500 words4 hrsArtifact 6
HW-719Filter all eight of your own layers against the World matrices. List every Gate that cannot form a ChannelFilter sheet, eight layers3 hrsGate 3
HW-820Order the Channels in four supplied charts by Channel Priority. One is the 30-41 caseFour ordered lists, with reasoning on the fourth2 hrsGate 3
HW-922Submit two completed Tier Two practicum reports for formative comment. Not markedTwo reportsAlready counted in the practicumGate 5
HW-1024Elective proposal: which option, what you will produce, how it will be markedOne page1 hrElective
HW-1126Write an omission rationale for a reading you have already delivered400 to 600 words2 hrsGate 6

Total roughly 27 hours, inside the 20 allocated to artifacts plus the practicum, not on top of it.

⚠ HW-9 is formative and says so. The reference set has no formative step before its terminal assessment, and Phase 1B recorded that as a weakness. A candidate who first learns their reports fail the standard at Gate 5 has no route back.


Peer Practice Guide

Pairs, groups, mentor sessions, calls, check-ins.

For: Students and the team


What is below

Tier One reading · peer-facing

Tier Two reading · subject-facing

Call 1 · Week 6 · The whole cohort, first time

Call 2 · Week 10 · First readings

Call 3 · Week 14 · The instrument in use

Call 4 · Week 17 · Before the Map

Call 5 · Week 20 · The first full reading

Call 6 · Week 24 · Portfolio briefing

Call 7 · Week 27 · Defense briefing

The form

Why it is identical every time

The review rubric

What faculty does with the series

13 sections, about 2,711 words. This is a long document.

Version 1 · 6 August 2026


SECTION 6 — PEER DYAD PROTOCOL

Twelve readings received, twelve given, weeks 8 to 19. Partners rotate roughly every four to six sessions, which is the reference pattern: a candidate works with two or three partners across the program rather than one.

Tier One reading · peer-facing

Sixty minutes. The reader has the receiver's chart. The receiver is in the room.

MinBlock
0 to 5Chart closed. Reader asks: what would you like to have happen. Grove credited
5 to 15Reader opens the chart. Reads the eight layers aloud: what each one is, what is activated
15 to 30Foundation Pattern as printed, and the Sun orientation from Patterns of Orientation, all six fields
30 to 45Receiver responds. Does this land, where does it not, what is missing
45 to 55Reader names one thing they saw and did not say, and why
55 to 60Log both sides

Reader prepares 30 minutes beforehand. Reader submits: the log entry, and the one-line omission note. Receiver submits: the log entry, and one line on whether the reading landed.

Feedback order is fixed and it is not ours. The receiver speaks first, then anyone observing. Three questions: what was done well, what could be even better, what could be included. Adopted from the reference model, which is a format primitive and a good one, because observers who speak first frame the receiver's own experience.

Tier Two reading · subject-facing

Ninety minutes with the subject, plus report production. Weeks 19 to 27.

Before. Subject signs the practice subject consent form. The candidate states in writing that they are a candidate in training, are not certified, and are not charging. Chart generated by the Program.

MinBlock
0 to 10Chart closed. What would you like to have happen
10 to 25The eight layers, and which World the subject is speaking from
25 to 45Foundation Pattern, Sun orientation
45 to 70The priority Channels, in order. Not all of them. The two or three that matter
70 to 85Six Keys to Empowerment and six Action Points
85 to 90What happens next, and the referral line if it is needed

After. The practicum report, Map chapters only, roughly three hours. Log entry. Omission note, one paragraph.

The subject receives the report. The subject never receives their birth data back in writing and their initials only appear in any derived work.

⚠ If clinical material appears, the reading stops. Referral Protocol categories one and two govern and the candidate logs that a referral was made, to what category of professional, and the date. Never the content.


SECTION 7 — PEER GROUP PROTOCOL

Twelve sessions, sixty minutes, weekly, weeks 14 to 27. Groups of four.

Structure adopted from the reference model. Ten specified topics and two group choice sessions at the end. Each session names what to review beforehand and what happens in the room. The facilitator role rotates weekly. A group leader is appointed by the Program, not elected, and their job is scheduling, attendance and reporting problems to the Program, not facilitating.

⚠ No absent person's chart is discussed in any session. Practice is on the chart of somebody present.

Sequenced by her World order: Spiritual, Physical, Emotional, Mental. SOURCED.

#TopicReview firstIn the roomOutput
1What you say when someone asks what you doRC-1Each member gives a ninety-second account of the Four Worlds to a lay listener. Group feeds backOne paragraph each, kept
2Reading your own Map aloudHW-2Each reads their own Tier One write-up. Group asks one clean question eachRevised write-up
3The Spiritual/Archetypal World in a readingMastery Wk 1, RC-1One member's chart, present. Read only the two Spiritual layersOne-page reading
4The Physical/Biological World in a readingMastery Wk 2Same, Physical layers. Practice naming sensation without interpreting itOne-page reading
5The Emotional/Angelic World in a readingMastery Wk 3Same, Emotional layers. Practice witnessing rather than explainingOne-page reading
6The Mental/Waking World in a readingMastery Wk 4, RC-4Same, Mental layers. The story is the symptom, not the sourceOne-page reading
7Clean QuestionsLiving From Soul Ch.11. Grove creditedTen-minute rounds. One question only, then silenceTranscript of one round
8Stop, Observe, AlignThe Soul Knows slide 7Deliver the protocol as scripted, then adaptedScript, annotated
9Declining the medical inferenceBHD p.2, Referral ProtocolScripted client questions, four rounds. Nobody may answer with a diagnosisFour written responses
10What you left outHW-11Each brings one reading and names what they withheld. Group asks what rule they were followingRevised omission note
11Group choice—Anything: demonstration reading, tool review, business questionsLogged only
12Group choice—SameLogged only

Ten-minute practice intervals, taking turns. Feedback order is receiver first, then observers, three questions. Both adopted from the reference set.


SECTION 8 — PRACTICE INTEREST GROUP PROTOCOL

Eleven meetings, weeks 12 to 27. Eight peer-led at sixty minutes, three faculty-led at ninety. Groups of four to six, self-selected by niche.

⚠ The three faculty-led meetings run to all groups together, three sessions rather than nine, and every recording is available to every group regardless of niche. Both adopted from the reference model, which already shares facilitated recordings across niches.

Four niches, from her own audiences: Parents and Children · Clinicians and Therapists · Relationships · Health and Wellness.

#Led byTopicOutput
1PeerWho is in this niche and what they come forNiche brief, one page, group-written
2PeerThe reading this niche needs, and the reading it does notTwo lists
3Faculty, all groupsHer own clinical history with this population, and where the boundary sits for a graduateNotes
4PeerLanguage: what words work and what words close a person downVocabulary sheet
5PeerOne member's Tier Two reading, reviewed by the groupWritten comments
6Faculty, all groupsWhat she does when a reading in this niche goes somewhere it should notNotes
7PeerReading a child's chart, or a couple, or a client in treatment, by nicheOne protocol per niche
8PeerThe offer: what a practitioner in this niche sells, at what priceDraft offer
9PeerReferral: who you refer to in this niche, and whenReferral list, niche-specific
10Faculty, all groupsOpen surgery. Bring the reading that did not workNotes
11PeerNiche brief, final, and what each member will do firstFinal brief

One volunteer coordinator per group handles scheduling and attendance. Adopted from the reference model, which pushes group administration to the students.

⚠ Meeting 7 is the highest-exposure session in the program. Reading children's charts is parent-facing by design, and a practitioner in the Clinicians niche will have clients already in treatment. The protocol produced there must be reviewed by faculty, not just written by the group.



SECTION 9 — THE SIX MENTOR SESSIONS

Thirty minutes each, with Dr. Eleanor, at weeks 10, 15, 20, 23, 25 and 27. At least three weeks apart.

Session one is gated on two completed peer readings. Adopted exactly from the reference model, and the reason is that a candidate must have something to bring.

The candidate books each session individually on her calendar, one at a time. Not a block booked in advance.

Not recorded. The reference model prohibits recording mentor sessions and recommends audio only. Adopted, and the reason is candour: a candidate will not bring the reading that went badly to a session that is being filmed. She writes an assessment note. The note is the record.

⚠ This is the one place the capture plan is deliberately overruled. Mentor sessions are where the most useful material would be, and recording them would destroy the thing being captured.

#WkPurposeCandidate bringsShe assessesRecorded
110Can they read a chart at allTwo completed peer readings and their logsChart literacy, and whether they are reading the person or the pageAssessment note
215Orientation and PatternsOne reading where the Sun orientation did not landWhether they can hold a reading the receiver rejectedAssessment note
320First Tier Two readingTheir first Tier Two report, completeMethod rule compliance, and priority judgmentAssessment note
423The boundaryOne reading where something clinical appeared, or the nearest thing to itRestraint. Whether they stopped, and what they saidAssessment note, and a flag if the boundary was crossed
525PriorityTwo readings where they chose different priorities from the sheetWhether they can justify a departure or should not have made oneAssessment note
627Portfolio readinessTheir three intended portfolio readings, in draftWhether they are ready for Gate 6. A candidate may be told they are notAssessment note and a readiness statement

Cancellation. Rescheduling online up to twenty-four hours before. Inside twenty-four hours, contact her directly. A missed session or a cancellation inside twenty-four hours may carry a fee. Adopted from the reference model, which sets $75.

⚠ Session 6 can end a candidate's cohort. If the readiness statement is negative, the candidate defers to the next cohort's assessment window rather than failing Gate 6. That needs to be in the Agreement and it is not.



SECTION 10 — THE SEVEN GROUP CALLS

Two hours, monthly. Weeks 6, 10, 14, 17, 20, 24, 27. An agenda each, not a template.

Standing shape. Field reports first, always. Then the business of the call. Then the next milestone named, and what to bring to the next call.

Call 1 · Week 6 · The whole cohort, first time

The only moment before Intensive I with everyone present, including those who joined at week 6 with the Mastery credit.

Introductions, fifteen minutes, one Map each. Everyone has their own chart from the application, so introductions happen through the charts rather than through biographies.

The Certification Checklist, walked line by line. What every log is, when it opens, and what it means that nothing opens until week 8.

The eight rehearsals, explained as pedagogy. Said here rather than discovered later.

Scope of practice and the referral protocol, read aloud, in full. Before any teaching happens.

What to bring to Intensive I: their own chart printed, and their birth time confirmed to the minute if they can get it.

Call 2 · Week 10 · First readings

Field reports from the first two peer readings.

One question round: what did the receiver say that you had not seen in the chart.

The mentor session one gate explained: two completed peer readings, and what she will be looking for.

Milestone 1 due this week. What it asks and why the last question is the one that matters.

Call 3 · Week 14 · The instrument in use

Field reports.

Two candidates present a full Tier One reading of their own Map, ten minutes each, group response.

Peer groups open this week. The twelve-session arc explained, and the standing shape: ten minutes each, person read gives feedback first.

Common errors from HW-1 to HW-4, named without naming candidates.

Call 4 · Week 17 · Before the Map

Field reports, including the five Tier One practicum readings.

What changed when the subject was not a peer. Everyone answers.

Intensive II briefed. What the matrices are, why the lists matter, and that everything before this has been reading a chart rather than reading a Map.

Milestone 4 due. Practicum Tier One closes.

Call 5 · Week 20 · The first full reading

Field reports from the first Tier Two readings.

The gap between an ordered priority list and something a person can act on. She works one live, from a candidate's own chart.

The practicum report format, and what formative comment on HW-9 will look like.

Call 6 · Week 24 · Portfolio briefing

Field reports.

The three portfolio readings: what makes three readings different enough from each other to demonstrate range. This is what mentor session 6 assesses and candidates hear it four weeks early.

The omission rationale, worked once by her on a reading she has just described.

Elective proposals due. Each candidate says theirs in one sentence.

Call 7 · Week 27 · Defense briefing

Portfolios are in. Nothing new is taught.

What the oral defense is: one reading, defended live, thirty to forty-five minutes.

What she will ask. Why that reading, what you left out, and what you would do differently. Said plainly, because a defense is not an ambush.

Scheduling. Renewal, the license, and what happens at graduation.



SECTION 11 — THE SEVEN MILESTONE SUBMISSIONS

Asynchronous. A form, not a call. Thirty minutes. Reviewed by faculty, not marked.

Weeks 10, 13, 15, 17, 21, 24, 27. Identical every time, deliberately.

The form

1. Readings completed since the last milestone. Received, given, practicum, by number.

2. Hours logged since the last milestone.

3. One thing that improved.

4. One thing that did not.

5. One question for faculty.

6. In a reading this period, what did you choose not to say, and why.

7. Anything you want us to know that these questions did not ask.

Why it is identical every time

Because the point is the series, not the entry. Seven answers to question 6 across eighteen weeks show whether a candidate's judgment is developing, and that cannot be seen in one submission.

And because a form that changes every time takes longer to complete than one that does not, which matters when the whole thing is meant to take thirty minutes.

The review rubric

Not marked. Reviewed, with three possible outcomes.

OutcomeTriggerAction
NotedComplete, on time, question 6 answered substantivelyLogged. No response required
ReplyA question in field 5 that needs answering, or an answer in field 4 that suggests a competency gapFaculty replies in writing within five days
FlagQuestion 6 left blank or answered with nothing left out. Or a count in field 1 that is behind by more than two readings. Or field 4 blank on three consecutive milestonesRaised at the next mentor session
⚠ ESCALATEQuestion 6 describes withholding clinical material. A candidate who reports that they chose not to raise something clinical has already committed the Category Two failure in the Referral ProtocolImmediate. Faculty contacts the candidate within 48 hours and Dr. Eleanor is informed the same day. Not held for the next mentor session

⚠ Nothing left out is a flag, not an acceptable answer. A candidate who says they said everything either did not notice what they withheld or withheld nothing, and both need a conversation. This is the earliest available signal of a Gate 6 failure and it fires at week 10.

⚠ Field 4 blank on three consecutive milestones is a flag because a candidate reporting only improvement across nine weeks of learning to read is not reporting accurately.

⚠ The escalate row and Gate 6's fourth omission-rationale failure condition are the same failure, detected twenty-one weeks apart.

At week 10 it is a milestone answer. At week 31 it fails the credential.

A reviewer who notices it at week 10 and files it as a flag has converted a recoverable teaching moment into a certification failure, and that would be the program's error rather than the candidate's.

So the instruction to the reviewer is explicit: escalate, do not note. The candidate is contacted within forty-eight hours, the Referral Protocol is worked with them, and the incident is recorded against the referral competency rather than against their character.

This is the single most important line in the milestone rubric and it is the reason the rubric exists at all.

What faculty does with the series

At mentor session 6, week 27, all seven milestone answers to question 6 are read together as one input to portfolio readiness.

A candidate whose answers to question 6 have not changed in eighteen weeks is not ready for Gate 6, and that is a judgment stated here so it is not a surprise at week 27.


Sections 1, 4, 10 and 11 complete. Next: 13, 14, 15 and 16.

Logs And Forms

Ten forms and their fields.

For: The team


Version 1 · 6 August 2026


SECTION 12 — LOGS AND FORMS

One reading log, not four. The reference set uses a single sheet for every reading type, distinguished by a type column, and that is the primitive worth taking.

The Reading Log

Two documents, linked by Subject ID.

The Subject Roster is yours and you never submit it. It carries the full name and contact details of everyone you read, because you cannot follow up with somebody called JS, and a practitioner has to be able to reach the people they have worked with.

The Reading Log is what you submit. It carries the Subject ID and initials, and everything about the reading itself.

⚠ This is why Subject ID exists. It lets you resolve an entry to a real person and it lets faculty assess your practice without holding a list of your subjects.

The Subject Roster · private, never submitted

FieldNotes
Subject IDProgram-issued. The link to everything else
Full nameYes, the full name. This document is yours
ContactEmail or phone, as they gave it
RelationshipPeer, practice subject, or client
First readingDate
Consent formWhere the signed form is filed
WithdrawnIf they ask to be removed, the date

Retention is yours to manage. You hold it as long as you have a professional reason to and no longer. If a subject asks to be removed, remove them.

⚠ The roster never leaves your possession. Not to faculty, not at Gate 4, not in a case write-up, not in anything you publish. Everything outside this one document uses the Subject ID and initials.

The Reading Log · submitted at Gate 4

⚠ Field structure diverges from the reference set deliberately. Their log stores client name, telephone number and email address in the log itself. Ours puts those in the Roster instead, so the log can be submitted without handing anyone a list of your subjects.

FieldNotes
Entry numberSequential
TypePeer received · Peer given · Practicum Tier One · Practicum Tier Two · Portfolio
Subject initialsInitials only. The full name is in your Roster, not here
Subject IDProgram-issued. Links to the chart, and to the full name in your Roster, without carrying either
Date
DurationHours to the quarter
Report producedNone · Map chapters · Full nine sections
Consent on fileYes or no. A no makes the entry invalid
Referral madeNone · Category one · Category two · Category three
Omission noteOne line. What was seen and not said
Notes

The omission note in the log is deliberate. Gate 6 requires a written rationale on three readings. Writing one line on every reading from week 8 means the candidate has done it thirty times before it is assessed.

The other logs and forms

FormContentsWho submits
Peer group logSession number, date, topic, facilitator that week, attendance, output producedEach member, their own
PIG logMeeting number, date, peer-led or faculty-led, niche, outputEach member, their own
Mentor logSession number, date booked, date held, what was broughtCandidate. Her assessment note is separate and is not the candidate's to hold
Practice subject consentSubject name and signature, date, statement that the candidate is in training and not certified, no fee charged, recording consent yes or no, birth data never published, initials only, withdrawal rightSubject, retained by candidate, copy to the Program
Practice plan30 day, 3 month, 12 month. Who you serve, what you offer, at what price, how they find youCandidate, weeks 21 draft and 27 final
Client agreement templateSee Artifact 8 in Section 14Program supplies, candidate adapts, faculty reviews
Referral listOne licensed mental health clinician, one physician, crisis number per jurisdiction where clients liveCandidate, week 25, faculty checks
Milestone submissionSee Section 11Candidate, seven times

Six gates, the rubrics, and failing.

The Six Gates Explained

Each gate on half a page.

For: Everyone


What is below

Gate 1 · Reading a chart

Gate 2 · Patterns of Orientation

Gate 3 · The four World matrices

Gate 4 · Practice and conduct

Gate 5 · Three written reports

Gate 6 · Three readings, and one defended out loud

Why the last gate is the hardest

Two more tries and no more

8 sections, about 786 words. This is a long document.

How a student passes this program

Version 1 · 6 August 2026 · Depends on: Grading_Rubrics, Student_Handbook


A student must pass six tests. We call them gates.

Each gate tests one thing. A student cannot skip one.

This page says what each gate is. The detailed grading is in Grading_Rubrics.


Gate 1 · Reading a chart

What the student does. Reads a Noble Energy® Map. Names the eight layers. Finds every marking on the page. Reads the birth chart behind it.

When. End of the first weekend, week 7.

Who grades it. Faculty, against an answer key.

Passing looks like. They can point at anything on a chart and say what it is.

Failing means. One more try, at least two weeks later.


Gate 2 · Patterns of Orientation

What the student does. Reads a person's pattern from the position of the Sun. Explains why Dr. Eleanor does not use Profile or Lines, and says what she uses instead.

When. End of the first weekend, week 7.

Who grades it. Faculty, against an answer key.

Passing looks like. They can read the pattern, and they say no when a client asks them to read a Profile.

Failing means. One more try.


Gate 3 · The four World matrices

What the student does. Works out which parts of a chart are live in which World, puts them in the right order of importance, and explains why the thing that appears most often is not always the thing that matters most.

When. End of the second weekend, week 18.

Who grades it. Faculty, against an answer key.

Passing looks like. They can order a chart correctly without help.

Failing means. One more try.

⚠ This gate cannot be graded yet. It needs four lists of gate numbers from Charles.


Gate 4 · Practice and conduct

What the student does. Hands in every log, every consent form, their own client agreement, and their referral list.

When. Week 29.

Who grades it. Admin checks it is complete.

Passing looks like. Everything is there and nothing has a client's birth date in it.

Failing means. They finish the missing items.

One rule is strict. Birth dates, birth times and birth places must never appear anywhere. One slip fails this gate.


Gate 5 · Three written reports

What the student does. Hands in three full reports, one for each of three people they read.

When. Handed in during week 28, 29 or 30. Graded weeks 29 to 34.

Who grades it. The program's report marker checks it against Dr. Eleanor's own written standard. Dr. Eleanor signs it off.

Passing looks like. Four things must be true of every report. All nine sections are there. Nothing is made up. Nothing is copied word for word. The order of importance is right.

Failing means. That report is done again. If a report comes back twice, Dr. Eleanor takes over the marking herself.


Gate 6 · Three readings, and one defended out loud

This is the one that matters most.

What the student does. Records three readings with real people. For each one, writes down what they chose not to say, and why. Then talks Dr. Eleanor through one of the three.

When. Weeks 29 to 34.

Who grades it. Dr. Eleanor.

Passing looks like. They opened on the person, not the chart. They spoke in the language of the World the person was in. They knew when to stop. And they can explain every choice they made to leave something out.

Failing means. One more try, with a new person. They cannot rewrite the old one, because the judgment happened in the room.


Why the last gate is the hardest

Anyone can be taught to say more.

Knowing what to leave out is the skill this program certifies, and it is a judgment rather than a technique.

So the same question is asked of every student fourteen times before it is graded. In every practice reading. In every check-in. In their homework. In a mentor session. In the last weekend.

A student is never marked down for an honest answer along the way. That is the point of asking so often.


Two more tries and no more

A student gets two further attempts at any gate, and no more.

The first is included in the price. A second, where it is allowed, costs a fee.

After that they get a letter saying they completed the coursework. That is not a certification.

Without a limit, passing would come down to who keeps trying rather than who can do the work. It also means Dr. Eleanor is not the person who has to keep saying no to someone she has taught for eight months.

Grading Rubrics

Every row a grader marks.

For: Faculty and the report marker

Not simplified. Precision matters more than readability here.

What is below

THE SIX GATES, WITH RUBRICS

Gate 1 · Chart literacy · End of Intensive I

Gate 2 · Patterns of Orientation and the displacements · End of Intensive I

Gate 3 · The matrices and priority · End of Intensive II

Gate 4 · Practicum and conduct · Week 29

Gate 5 · Report portfolio · Opens week 27, marked from week 30

Gate 6 · Reading portfolio and oral defense · Week 31

GATE 5 · REPORT PORTFOLIO

The threshold, stated before the criteria

The rubric, once the threshold holds

GATE 6 · READING PORTFOLIO AND ORAL DEFENSE

The omission rationale, and what constitutes a fail

The rubric

The oral defense

14 sections, about 1,936 words. This is a long document.

Version 1 · 6 August 2026


THE SIX GATES, WITH RUBRICS

Every rubric is marked against four criteria: technical accuracy, priority judgment, world-congruent delivery, and restraint. Not every gate touches all four, and each rubric says which.

Three bands throughout. Meets, Developing, Not yet. Meets is required to pass. A Developing result carries one further attempt. A Not yet result carries one further attempt and a named remediation.

Gate 1 · Chart literacy · End of Intensive I

Criteria: technical accuracy only.

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
NotationReads Design, Personality, gate and line, and all thirteen glyphs without promptingTwo or three errors, self-corrects when askedCannot separate Design from Personality
The eight layersNames all eight, their windows, and the World of eachNames all eight, confuses two windowsCannot name all eight
Layers and chartsDistinguishes eight layers from ten printed charts, names all three Integrated viewsNames two of three Integrated viewsConflates layers and charts
The 88-unit ruleDerives three windows from the rule unaidedDerives with the rule in front of themCannot derive
Types and CentersDetermines Type per layer, marks definition correctly across eight layersOne layer wrongMore than one layer wrong
ColorApplies all four coding rulesApplies threeCannot apply the Center rule
Natal wheelReads signs, houses, rulerships and keynotesNeeds the keynote sheetCannot locate a ruler

Gate 2 · Patterns of Orientation and the displacements · End of Intensive I

Criteria: technical accuracy, and restraint.

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
The instrumentReads any Gate's entry across all six fieldsReads four fieldsCannot locate the Sun's Gate
Foundation PatternsReads them as printed, names Pattern, variant and qualityNames Pattern and variantCannot read the printed Pattern
The displacementsExplains why neither Profile nor Lines carries meaning, and names what replaces eachExplains Profile, not LinesExplains neither
DecliningDeclines to interpret Profile or Lines when asked, without dismissing the personDeclines, but awkwardly or apologeticallyInterprets when asked
AttributionCredits Escobar and Crane for the dwad techniquePromptedDoes not

⚠ The Declining row is a restraint criterion inside a technical gate, deliberately. A candidate who knows the finding and interprets anyway when a client pushes has not met this gate.

Gate 3 · The matrices and priority · End of Intensive II

Criteria: technical accuracy, and priority judgment.

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
Matrix filterFilters any layer correctly, in-matrix and outOne error across eight layersMore than one
Channel formationForms all Channels correctly and accounts for every leftover Gate as a transit imprintForms Channels, does not account for imprintsForms Channels incorrectly
PortalsIdentifies every Portal and explains the 148Identifies mostCannot define a Portal
Priority orderOrders correctly against the sheet, all eight layersOne transpositionMultiple
Frequency versus priorityGiven a Channel present in all eight layers at low rank, ranks it correctly and explains whyRanks correctly, cannot explainRanks by frequency
Integration compositesIdentifies them and states that they lead the orderIdentifies themMisses them

⚠ Gate 3 cannot be assessed until the four gate matrix membership lists exist. The rubric is complete and the answer keys are derived from the lists.

Gate 4 · Practicum and conduct · Week 29

Criteria: restraint, and completeness. Marked as complete or incomplete, per line.

ItemRequired
Readings received log12 entries, all fields
Readings given log12 entries, all fields, each with what landed and what did not
Peer group log12 entries, leader-signed
PIG log11 entries, plus the niche statement from meeting 11
Mentor log6 entries, her signature, plus the session 4 half page
Practicum Tier One log5 entries, each with a signed consent form
Practicum Tier Two log10 entries, each with a signed consent form and an omission note
Client agreementOwn version, all twelve clauses, clause 4 present and unmodified
Referral listComplete, dated, and dated no later than week 11
AnonymizationNo birth data and no full names anywhere in any submitted material. One instance is an incomplete gate
Subject RosterNot submitted, and not requested. The candidate attests that it exists, is current, and is held securely
Program reviewSubmitted
ElectiveSubmitted and marked

⚠ The anonymization line is pass or fail on a single instance, because a practitioner who publishes birth data once will do it again.

⚠ The Subject Roster is deliberately outside this gate. A candidate needs the full names of everyone they read, because a practitioner cannot follow up with initials. So the names live in a document the Program never sees, and the log submitted here carries the Subject ID instead. Faculty assess the practice without holding a list of the subjects.

Gate 5 · Report portfolio · Opens week 27, marked from week 30

Criteria: technical accuracy, and priority judgment. Three reports. Marked by the Program's report marker against the Template Specification, countersigned by Dr. Eleanor.

Full rubric in section 13.

Gate 6 · Reading portfolio and oral defense · Week 31

Criteria: all four, weighted to restraint. Three recorded readings, three omission rationales, one defended live. Assessed by Dr. Eleanor.

Full rubric in section 13.


GATE 5 · REPORT PORTFOLIO

Assessed across weeks 29 to 34.

Marked by the Program's report marker against the Template Specification. Countersigned by Dr. Eleanor.

The threshold, stated before the criteria

Four conditions. Every one must hold on every report.

#Condition
1All nine sections present. A missing section is not a deduction
2No fabricated content. Nothing asserted about the chart that the chart does not support
3Synthesis, not quotation. No verbatim passage from Beyond Human Design or Channel Master
4Priority order correct. Against the Channel Priorities sheet, and integration-only Channels named

Any one condition failing is a resubmission of that report. It is not a partial pass and it is not a Developing band.

⚠ This threshold exists because two people mark this gate. Without a stated pass line, a marker and a countersigner will apply different standards and the countersignature becomes a rubber stamp. The four conditions are objectively determinable, which is what makes them safe to delegate.

Two resubmissions on the same report escalate to Dr. Eleanor directly. She marks it herself, and the marker's assessment is set aside rather than appealed.

The rubric, once the threshold holds

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
Layer computationEvery layer's Channels computed correctly, prenatal paired with postnatal correctly per WorldOne pairing errorMore than one
Matrix filterEvery activated Gate correctly in or out of matrix, transit imprints accounted forImprints not accounted forFilter errors
Priority reasoningThe report says what the priority order implies. The top of the order is the substance of the reportOrder correct, report does not follow itReport follows frequency rather than priority
World-matched interpretationEach Channel read in the language of the World it is active inOne Channel read genericallyRead generically throughout
Sun and MoonCorrespondences confirmed and stated when exactConfirmed, not statedNot confirmed
Astrology sectionsNatal, dwad, current sky and eclipse thread complete, eclipse degrees approximate unless certainOne section thinA section missing, which is also a threshold failure
Keys and Action PointsAbout six of each, drawn from the priority order, actionable this weekSix of each, not drawn from the orderGeneric
Format and languageTypography, color, capitalisation, trademark placement, Teaching Notes all correctTwo or three errorsSystematic

Meets on all eight rows to pass. A single Developing row carries one revision, not a resubmission.

GATE 6 · READING PORTFOLIO AND ORAL DEFENSE

Assessed by Dr. Eleanor across weeks 29 to 34. All four criteria, weighted to restraint.

The omission rationale, and what constitutes a fail

This is the criterion the whole credential rests on and it is the one most open to a generous marker, so the failure conditions are named rather than left to judgment.

A rationale fails on any one of these.

1. It states that nothing was withheld. A reading in which a practitioner said everything they saw is either a reading of a chart rather than a person, or a rationale that was not attempted.

2. Everything listed is a lapse rather than a decision. Things the candidate did not notice at the time are not omissions. An omission is a choice, and a rationale that lists only oversights is describing incompetence rather than restraint.

3. No rule is given. A withholding justified only by preference or by how it felt is not accounted for. The candidate must name what they were following.

4. ⚠ Clinical material was withheld and the rationale treats the withholding as sufficient.

This is the failure most likely to be marked generously and it is the most serious. A candidate who writes that they chose not to raise the subject's depression, or the subject's disclosure about their drinking, and presents that as restraint, has confused withholding with referring. The referral protocol requires them to stop and connect the person to someone qualified. Saying nothing and continuing the reading is a Category Two failure wearing restraint as a costume, and it fails the gate rather than reducing the band.

⚠ And this failure is detectable from week 10. Milestone question 6 asks what the candidate chose not to say. A milestone answer describing withheld clinical material is this same failure, twenty-one weeks earlier, and the milestone rubric now escalates it within forty-eight hours rather than noting it. If it reaches Gate 6 undetected, the program failed the candidate before the candidate failed the gate.

5. The rationale itself breaches anonymization. Birth data, a full name, or a description of personal circumstances in the rationale is a fail, on one instance.

The rubric

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
Opening on the personThe chart is closed for the opening. The first thing said is a question, not a findingOpens with a finding, recoversReads the chart aloud from the top
World identificationIdentifies the World the subject is speaking from and answers in it, audibly, more than onceIdentifies onceAnswers throughout in their own dominant World
Clean questioningDeepens without leading. Grove credited in the report front matterTwo or three leading questionsLeads throughout
WitnessingEmotion is witnessed, not explainedOne explanation offeredExplains rather than witnesses
Priority deliveredThe subject leaves with the small number that matters, not the forty that are trueDelivers the order without reducing itDelivers everything
The boundary heldAny clinical material recognized, named, and referred. Any diagnostic question declined without losing the subjectDeclined awkwardlyAnswered, or continued past clinical material
The omission rationalePasses all five failure conditions above, and names a rule for each withholdingPasses the conditions, rules are thinFails any one condition
The defenseCan say why that reading, what was left out, and what they would do differentlyTwo of the threeCannot account for their own choices

Meets on all eight rows to pass. A Not yet on the boundary row or the omission row is a Not yet on the gate, regardless of the other six.

The oral defense

Thirty to forty-five minutes, one to one, with Dr. Eleanor.

One of the three readings, chosen by her.

Three questions, given to candidates in advance at group call 7. Why that reading. What did you leave out. What would you do differently.

A defense is not an ambush and the questions are published, because what is being assessed is whether the candidate can account for their own judgment, not whether they can be surprised.

If A Student Does Not Pass

Three results, two attempts, the appeal route.

For: Students and faculty


Version 1 · 6 August 2026


This page says what happens when a student fails a gate, in plain language. The detailed grading is in Grading_Rubrics.

Three results, not two

ResultWhat it means
MeetsPassed. Nothing further
DevelopingClose. One revision on the specific parts named. Not the whole thing again
Not yetDid not pass. One more attempt, plus specific work to do first

How many tries

Two further attempts at any gate, and no more.

The first is included in the price.

A second, where it is allowed at all, costs a fee.

After that, the student receives a letter saying they completed the coursework. That is not a certification and it allows them to use nothing.

Why there is a limit

Without one, passing comes down to who keeps trying rather than who can do the work.

It also protects Dr. Eleanor. She is the only person grading the last gate. By the end she has taught that student for eight months and mentored them six times, and they have paid $14,997. Without a limit she is the person who has to keep saying no to someone she knows well.

A stated limit means the answer belongs to the agreement rather than to her.

Two gates work differently

Gate 5, the three written reports. If a report fails on one of the four basic conditions, that report is done again. If the same report fails twice, Dr. Eleanor takes over marking it herself.

Gate 6, the three readings. If a student fails on the boundary or on the written account of what they left out, they cannot revise it. They do a new reading with a new person. The judgment being graded happened in the room, and rewriting the account of it is not a second attempt at making it.

Appeals

Appeals are decided by Marvin Portner, MD, in consultation with Dr. Eleanor and not by her.

Lodged in writing within fourteen days, saying which part is disputed.

For Gate 5 this is fully independent: Raz marks, Dr. Eleanor signs off, Marvin decides. Nobody reviews their own decision.

⚠ For Gate 6 in the first cohort it is not fully independent, because she is the only person who can grade it. From the second cohort a certified graduate grades it, she signs off, and Marvin decides. That is stated plainly rather than dressed up.

Timing

No sooner than two weeks after a result. No later than eight weeks after it.

Sales page, application, emails, prices.

Sales Page Copy

The public page, in full.

For: The team

Practitioner register, not simplified.

What is below

HERO

An eight-month certification in reading Noble Energy® Maps, taught by the woman who built them.

OPENING

WHAT THIS CERTIFIES

WHAT YOU WILL BE ABLE TO DO

WHY THIS COSTS WHAT IT COSTS

One. I teach all of it.

Two. Twelve people.

Three. Your mentor sessions are with me.

Four. You finish holding a product, not a philosophy.

HOW THE EIGHT MONTHS RUN

WHAT YOU DO IN THE PROGRAM

WHAT YOU ARE ASSESSED ON

WHAT THIS IS NOT

WHO THIS IS FOR

TUITION

HOW TO APPLY

QUESTIONS

CLOSE

19 sections, about 2,834 words. This is a long document.

Cohort One · Copy for review

Prepared for Brendan McCauley, Growing Entrepreneur, LLC · 2026-08-05


BEFORE THE COPY, FOUR NOTES

Register. Practitioner register throughout, per 01. First person, one sentence per paragraph, no dashes, no exclamation points, no salesy phrasing. This is the coldest page in the ecosystem and it carries the highest price, so it does not sell. It states.

Sequencing. Cohort One is announced now and applications open 2 November, which turns a two-month gap into first access rather than silence. Two or three Four Worlds Mastery cohorts feed it between now and then, and every Mastery graduate holds the $2,997 credit. They are approached directly before this page is public. That copy is a separate short email and it is the next thing to write, not this.

No founding rate on this page. Pulled pending the counsel ruling on the barter structure. If Structure A survives, one section changes.

No competitor is named. The premium is argued on four positive legs. Naming an alternative invites a price comparison the page then has to win on the alternative's terms.

Claims discipline observed. Over fifty years. Over 45,000 cases, statistical and clinical. No 99% figure, no science-has-proven construction, no self-actualisation claim, no earnings projection. The report and reading prices appear as her own prices, not as a graduate's expected income.


THE PAGE


HERO

Read the Four Worlds

An eight-month certification in reading Noble Energy® Maps, taught by the woman who built them.

Twelve places. Cohort One begins 4 January 2027 and graduates in September.

Applications open Monday 2 November 2026. Four Worlds Mastery graduates get first access.

Join the list for first access →


OPENING

I am Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner.

I am a licensed clinical psychologist, and for over fifty years I have been studying one question.

Why do people who have done everything right still feel that something is missing.

The answer I found is that a person does not live in one World.

You live in four at once, and you were complete by the time you were three months old.

Your Mental/Waking World carries how you think and perceive.

Your Spiritual/Archetypal World carries your dream life, your intuition, and your sense of timing.

Your Emotional/Angelic World carries feeling as intelligence.

Your Physical/Biological World carries your body and its rhythms.

Most systems that map a person map one of these and then wonder why the change did not hold.

Noble Energy® Maps map all four, and the research behind them covers over 45,000 cases, statistical and clinical.

This certification teaches you to read them.


WHAT THIS CERTIFIES

There is one thing a graduate of this program can do that nobody else can.

Read a person's Noble Energy® Maps, produce a report to my own standard, and deliver a reading the person can act on.

Notice the order of that sentence.

The Map is the instrument.

The person is what you are reading.

I have watched practitioners spend years learning to decode a chart and never learn to close it and look at who is in front of them.

That is what you are certified on here.


WHAT YOU WILL BE ABLE TO DO

Read all eight layers of a person's Maps, from the third trimester through the first three months of life.

Read the Foundation Pattern, and read a person's orientation from the Sun's Hexagram rather than from a Profile, which I do not interpret and will show you why.

Apply the World matrices, so you know which energies are live in which World and which are only passing through.

Order what you find by Channel Priority, so a person hears the two things that matter this year and not the forty that are true.

Produce a Four Worlds report to the same specification I use in my own practice.

Deliver a reading in the language of the World the person is speaking from.

And know what not to say.

That last one is a competency here, and it is assessed.


WHY THIS COSTS WHAT IT COSTS

You can find shorter certifications and cheaper ones.

Four things here are not available at a lower price, and I would rather state them than imply them.

One. I teach all of it.

Every hour of live instruction in this program is taught by me.

Not by a faculty trained to deliver my material.

By the person who built the system, who ran the research, and who has been reading these Maps since before there was a name for them.

Two. Twelve people.

The cohort is capped at twelve, and that is a constraint rather than a class size.

It is the reason the next point is possible.

Three. Your mentor sessions are with me.

Six one-to-one sessions, spread across the program, with me.

Not with a graduate of an earlier cohort.

There is no earlier cohort.

Four. You finish holding a product, not a philosophy.

In my own practice a Four Worlds report is $397 and a reading is $750.

Those are my prices in my own practice, and what a graduate charges is theirs to set.

Most certifications hand you a method and leave you to work out what it is worth.

This one hands you an instrument with a price on it.


HOW THE EIGHT MONTHS RUN

Three intensives, and the practice between them.

When
Module 1 · Four Worlds MasteryWeeks 1 to 5, from 4 January 2027Live, five weeks
Intensive I · The InstrumentThursday 18 to Sunday 21 February 202711:00 AM to 5:00 PM Eastern, virtual
Intensive II · The MapThursday 6 to Sunday 9 May 2027Same hours, virtual
Intensive III · The ReadingThursday 15 to Sunday 18 July 2027Same hours, virtual
Portfolio submissionStaggered, 12 July to 1 August 2027Three windows, four candidates each
Assessment19 July to 29 August 2027Reports marked, readings reviewed, defense
GraduationWeek of 20 September 2027

Everything is virtual, so there is no travel and no venue.

Eleven to five, four days, is a deliberate pace.

I am not interested in teaching you six things a day that you cannot hold.

Through the two practice cycles, which is most of the program, you carry about nine hours a week.

Module 1 is lighter, closer to three and a half, and the assessment period is lighter again.

I would rather tell you nine now than have you find out in April.

Most of that is reading people, because that is the only way this is learned.


WHAT YOU DO IN THE PROGRAM

Twelve readings you receive from a peer, so you know what this feels like from the other chair.

Twelve readings you give to a peer.

Twelve peer group sessions, and eleven meetings of a Practice Interest Group in the field you intend to work in.

Six mentor sessions with me.

Fifteen practice readings, each with a chart, a report, and a delivered session.

Three portfolio readings, submitted.

Thirty readings delivered by you before you are certified.

Roughly 296 hours in total, of which 272 are instructional and working hours.

The other 24 are the breaks inside the intensives, and I would rather tell you that than have you find it out.

The elective moves the total, up or down, by anywhere from six hours to thirty.

Which is worth putting next to the price.

At $14,997 across 296 hours, this program costs about $50 an hour.

An accredited coach certification typically runs around 150 hours for roughly $10,000, which is closer to $65 an hour.

I am not going to tell you this is cheap.

I am telling you that per hour of instruction and supervised practice, it costs less than the accredited alternative, and that the four things above are what you get on top of that.


WHAT YOU ARE ASSESSED ON

Six gates, and you see the rubric for every one of them on day one.

1. Chart literacy. The notation, the eight layers, the ten printed charts, the Foundation Patterns, the color system, the natal wheel.

2. Patterns of Orientation. All sixty-four, and why neither Profile nor Lines carry an interpretation.

3. The matrices and priority. Which Gates form Channels in which World, and what order they ask for attention in.

4. Practicum and conduct. Every log complete, the anonymization standard applied, your client agreement and referral list in place.

5. Report portfolio. Three reports, marked against my own specification.

6. Reading portfolio and oral defense. Three recorded readings, each with a written account of what you chose to leave out and why.

That sixth one is the credential.

Anyone can be taught to say more.


WHAT THIS IS NOT

I am a licensed clinical psychologist.

A graduate of this certification will not be, and I want that on the page rather than in a footnote.

A certified practitioner does not diagnose, treat, or advise on any medical or psychological condition.

A certified practitioner does not represent this work as clinical, psychological, or medical care.

A certified practitioner does not make claims about health outcomes, and does not read a Map to decide a medical question.

A certified practitioner does not continue a reading once clinical material appears.

A certified practitioner does not read for anyone under eighteen.

My own work with children is written for their parents, and I am a licensed clinical psychologist.

A graduate of this program is not, and that is the one place where the gap between us matters most.

A certified practitioner refers the person to a licensed clinician, and tells the person why.

If you are already licensed, your license is yours and this does not extend it.

If you are not, this program will teach you where the line is and hold you to it.


WHO THIS IS FOR

Coaches, therapists, counselors, clinicians, Human Design practitioners, astrologers, and bodyworkers who already work with people and keep meeting the same wall.

I am driven to get the Four Worlds to professionals, because they are the ones who can change it for children.

Who this is not for. Anyone looking for a credential to hang on a wall, anyone who wants this in a weekend, and anyone who wants a certification that lets them say more about a person than they know.

Mastery takes years.

This is where it starts, not where it finishes.


TUITION

Tuition is $14,997, and Four Worlds Mastery is included as Module 1.

If you have already completed Four Worlds Mastery, your $2,997 is credited in full and you pay $12,000.

You begin at week seven, with the first intensive, and you receive the recorded Mastery refresh at no charge.

You do not repeat weeks one through five.

Most of Cohort One will be in the second case, because most of the people I am inviting have already done Mastery.

Three routes.

Paid in full, direct to us, takes $1,500 off. That is $13,497, or $10,500 with the Mastery credit.

Seven monthly payments, which is the plain division. That is 7 × $2,143, or 7 × $1,715 with the credit.

Third-party financing, arranged through our partner, at $14,997 or $12,000 paid to the lender.

The paid-in-full discount is for payment made directly to us.

Financing is also paid in full, by the lender, and the discount does not apply to it.

If paying in full is not possible for you, financing is the route, not the monthly plan.


HOW TO APPLY

This is an application, not a purchase.

I am careful about who I bring into this work, and twelve places is twelve.

The application takes about twenty-five minutes, and the three written answers are most of it.

It asks for your birth date, your birth time, and your birth place, because I read your Noble Energy® Map before we speak.

If we speak, that conversation will be a reading rather than an interview.

Applications openMonday 2 November 2026
Applications closeFriday 20 November 2026
You hear from me byMonday 30 November
Interviews1 to 9 December
Offers and agreements7 to 18 December
Cohort One beginsMonday 4 January 2027

If the twelve places fill, later applications go to the Cohort Two waitlist.

Cohort Two is not priced yet, and it will cost more than this one, because by then your mentor will be a graduate I am paying rather than me.

I am not going to raise the cap, because twelve is set by how many people I can mentor myself and not by how many want a place.

Apply →


QUESTIONS

How long is it, exactly?

Eight months. You begin 4 January 2027, the last intensive is in July, your portfolio and your defense run through August, and you graduate in the week of 20 September.

Do I need Four Worlds Mastery first?

No. It is included as Module 1 and runs live for the first five weeks. If you have already done it, it is credited in full.

Is any of it in person?

No. Everything is virtual, including the three intensives.

What if I cannot make one of the intensive weekends?

Then this is not your cohort. Three weekends across the eight months are the whole of the live teaching and there is no way to attend one later.

Do I need my exact birth time?

As close as you can get it. Two minutes changes the Moon, and I would rather know your time is approximate than assume it is not.

What happens if I finish the coursework but do not pass the assessment?

You receive a statement of completion of coursework, which is not a certification. There is a further attempt, and an appeal, and both are set out in the participant agreement before you sign anything.

Can I teach this afterwards?

No. Certification licenses you to read Maps and produce reports for your own clients. Teaching and certifying others is a separate thing and it is not included.

Will there be another cohort?

Yes. I intend to run this roughly twice a year, so the one after this begins in late 2027. The reason it is not more often is that I mentor every cohort myself, six sessions with every candidate, and twelve is what that allows.


CLOSE

Everything I know about reading a person across the Four Worlds, I learned by reading people.

Over fifty years, and over 45,000 cases.

There is no version of this that you get by watching.

If you want to learn it, apply, and let me read your Map.

Apply →

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor


HEADLINE ALTERNATES

Primary is Read the Four Worlds, which is short, unornamented, and states the deliverable.

Alternate A. You were built in four Worlds. Learn to read all of them.

Alternate B. A person does not live in one World. Learn to read the other three.

Both alternates carry more of the argument and less of the calm. Recommendation is the primary, because at $14,997 to a cold professional audience, confidence reads better than persuasion.


FLAGS FOR REVIEW

⚠ Dependency 0 is not resolved and this page sells the practicum. Thirty readings per candidate needs 360 generated Maps and there is no student access plan. The page promises fifteen practice readings and three portfolio readings. Do not publish before Charles answers. The January start buys until roughly the end of October, which is time rather than reprieve.

⚠ The two prices in "Why this costs what it costs" are hers, not projections. If legal review wants a disclaimer near them, it belongs there rather than in a footer.

⚠ "Will there be another cohort" answers honestly and refuses false scarcity. That is consistent with 01 and with her anti-guru position, and it will reduce conversion. Flagging it as a deliberate choice rather than an oversight.

⚠ The assessment answer references the participant agreement, which is with counsel and carries three unresolved items. The page should not go live before the agreement is settled enough that the answer is true.

⚠ The Cohort Two waitlist promise has a cost attached that is not yet priced. The page tells overflow applicants they go to a Cohort Two waitlist, and the internal plan is that Cohort One graduates mentor them. Under Section 16 Structure B those mentors are paid contractors, so Cohort Two carries a real mentor cost that Cohort One does not. That has to be in the Cohort Two price before this waitlist has anyone on it, and it is another reason the Section 16 ruling is the long pole rather than a formality.

⚠ One claim needs her confirmation before publication. Over 45,000 cases, statistical and clinical, appears twice. Four sources concur and she ruled on it directly on 5 August, so it is the safest form available. It is still worth her sighting it on the page.


End of sales page copy. Next: the direct approach to the Mastery cohort finishing 11 August, which goes out before this page is public.

Application Form Spec

Nine sections, forty fields.

For: The team


What is below

Section 1 · About you

Section 2 · Your work

Section 3 · Your route in

Section 4 · Why this, and why now

Section 5 · Your own Map

Section 6 · Scope of practice

Section 7 · Time, dates and terms

Section 8 · The faculty pathway

Section 9 · Declarations

Hard stops

Flags for the interview rather than for rejection

What to look for in 4.2

The applicant timeline, as set

13 sections, about 2,896 words. This is a long document.

Cohort One · Build specification and applicant-facing copy

Calendar revised to a January 2027 start

Prepared for Brendan McCauley, Growing Entrepreneur, LLC · 2026-08-05

For build in GoHighLevel. Applications open Monday 2 November, close Friday 20 November 2026.


HOW THIS IS BUILT

An application, not a checkout. No payment field anywhere. No place is created by submitting, and no card is taken until an offer is made and accepted.

One page, nine sections, roughly twenty-five minutes to complete. The three written answers are most of that, and the time is stated honestly because someone who budgets twelve minutes abandons the form exactly where the signal is. Every question either screens or informs the interview, and anything that does neither is not here.

The three written answers are capped at 150 words each. The cap is the point. A candidate who cannot say why in 150 words will not write a report a client can act on.

Birth data is collected, and that is the distinctive part. Dr. Eleanor reads the applicant's Noble Energy® Map before the interview. She selects by reading the person, which is what she has done for fifty years, and it turns the interview into a reading rather than a screen. It also gives every applicant something of value whether or not they are offered a place.

⚠ Section 8 records interest in a future faculty pathway and creates no obligation. It is worded to be safe under either structure counsel selects for Section 16 of the Participant Agreement, so it does not need rebuilding when that ruling lands.


APPLICANT-FACING OPENING COPY

Above the form. Her register.


Apply for Cohort One

This is an eight-month professional certification in reading Noble Energy® Maps.

Twelve people will be accepted.

Every hour of live instruction is taught by me, and your mentor sessions are with me.

I am careful about who I bring into this work.

That is why this is an application and an interview rather than a purchase.

Applications close Friday 20 November, interviews run 1 to 9 December, and Cohort One begins Monday 4 January 2027.

Before you begin, one thing to know.

I will read your Noble Energy® Map before we speak.

That is why the form asks for your birth date, time and place, and it is why our conversation will be a reading rather than an interview.

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor


THE FORM

Section 1 · About you

FieldTypeReq.Applicant-facing labelNotes
1.1Text✓Full name
1.2TextName you use professionallyIf different
1.3Email✓Email
1.4Phone✓Phone
1.5Text✓City, state or region, and country
1.6Select✓Your time zoneScreening field. Intensives run 11:00 AM to 5:00 PM Eastern, Thursday to Sunday, from Mount Pleasant, South Carolina. Anything beyond roughly six hours of Eastern needs a conversation before an offer
1.7TextWebsite
1.8Select✓How did you hear about this?Mastery · Manifest Your Dreams · a book · a practitioner · search · other

Section 2 · Your work

FieldTypeReq.LabelNotes
2.1Text✓What do you do now?Free text, one line
2.2Multi-select✓Which of these describe you?Coach · therapist or counselor · licensed clinician · Human Design practitioner · astrologer · energy or bodywork practitioner · educator · parent working with your own children · none of these
2.3Radio✓Do you hold a clinical, medical, or counseling license?Yes · No · In training. Not a filter. It changes what she says about scope in the interview
2.4TextIf yes, which license and in which state
2.5Select✓How long have you worked with clients?Not yet · under 2 years · 2 to 5 · 5 to 10 · over 10
2.6Select✓How many people do you currently work with in a typical month?None · 1 to 5 · 6 to 15 · 16 to 30 · more than 30
2.7Radio✓Do you currently charge for your work?Yes · No · Sometimes
2.8TextWhat do you currently charge, and for what?Screening signal. The graduate offer is a $397 report and a $750 reading. Someone who has never charged has further to travel

Section 3 · Your route in

FieldTypeReq.LabelNotes
3.1Radio✓Have you completed Four Worlds Mastery?Yes · No · Currently enrolled
3.2DateWhen did you complete it?Shown if 3.1 is Yes
3.3Info panel—Displayed, not askedIf Yes: your $2,997 is credited in full against tuition, you begin at week seven with the first intensive, and you receive the recorded Mastery refresh at no charge. You do not repeat weeks one through five. If No: Four Worlds Mastery is included as Module 1 and runs live for the first five weeks
3.4Multi-selectWhich of her books have you read?The ten titles, plus none yet

Section 4 · Why this, and why now

Three answers, 150 words each. Hard character limit with a live counter.

4.1 ✓ Why do you want to read Noble Energy® Maps for other people?

4.2 ✓ Tell me about one person you have worked with who did not get what they came for. What do you think was missing?

4.3 ✓ What do you intend to do with this certification in the year after you finish?

⚠ 4.2 is the question that does the work. It is drawn from her own thesis, that everyone who came to her came because nobody recognized their soul. An applicant who blames the client answers it one way, and an applicant who looks at their own map answers it another.

Section 5 · Your own Map

Introductory copy, applicant-facing:

I will read your Noble Energy® Map before we speak.

>

For that I need your birth date, your birth time as precisely as you can give it, and your birth place.

>

Birth time matters more than people expect, because two minutes changes the Moon.

>

If you do not know your birth time, apply anyway and tell me so.
FieldTypeReq.LabelNotes
5.1Date✓Birth date
5.2Time✓Birth timeInclude AM or PM. Free text fallback for uncertainty
5.3Radio✓How certain is that time?From a birth certificate · from a family member · approximate · unknown
5.4Text✓Birth city, state or region, and country
5.5Checkbox✓I consent to Noble Energy® Wellness generating and reading my Noble Energy® Map for the purpose of this application.See the data note below
5.6Checkbox✓If I am accepted, my own Noble Energy® Map becomes material my cohort learns on. My dyad partner will read it, and it will be read in a peer group session only when I am there. It may appear in another candidate's written practice work under my initials only, never with my birth data.⚠ Narrowed 6 August. An earlier version consented to eleven peers reading the chart and discussing it in the candidate's absence. The reference model forbids discussing an absent person's chart and it is right. No absent chart is read or discussed. The opt-out is withdrawn because there is nothing left to opt out of

⚠ Data handling, and this needs to be true before the form goes live. Birth data is identifying. It is used for this application only, it is not published in any form, and it is deleted on request. Applicants who are not offered a place should be told what happens to their data. This is the same standard as Section 14 of the Participant Agreement and it should be stated on the form rather than buried in a policy.

Section 6 · Scope of practice

Applicant-facing copy, then one acknowledgment. This appears before any commitment question, deliberately.

I am a licensed clinical psychologist.

>

A graduate of this certification will not be.

>

That boundary is not a footnote in this program, it is one of the six things you will be assessed on.

>

A certified practitioner will not diagnose, treat, or advise on any medical or psychological condition.

>

A certified practitioner will not represent this work as clinical, psychological, or medical care.

>

A certified practitioner will not make claims about health outcomes, and will not read a Map to decide a medical question.

>

A certified practitioner will not continue a reading once clinical material appears.

>

A certified practitioner will refer the person to a licensed clinician, and will tell the person why.
FieldTypeReq.Label
6.1Checkbox✓I have read the above and I understand that this certification confers no clinical, medical, or counseling license
6.2TextareaAnything you want to say or ask about that boundary100 words. Optional, and the answers will be the most useful thing on the form

Section 7 · Time, dates and terms

FieldTypeReq.LabelNotes
7.1Checkbox group✓I can attend all three intensives, Thursday to Sunday, 11:00 AM to 5:00 PM Eastern18 to 21 Feb 2027 · 6 to 9 May 2027 · 15 to 18 Jul 2027. Three separate boxes, all required
7.2Radio✓The program needs about nine hours a week through the two practice cycles, which is most of it. Lighter in Module 1 and during assessment. Can you commit that from January to August?Yes · Yes with some weeks tighter than others · I am not sure. The figure is stated high deliberately. Mid-program attrition in a cohort of twelve costs more than losing an applicant at the form
7.3Radio✓Which payment route are you likely to take?Paid in full, direct, at $13,497 or $10,500 with the credit · seven monthly payments · third-party financing through our partner · not sure yet. Not binding, and it tells you what to prepare for the offer call. Field help text carries the one rule: the paid-in-full discount is for direct payment and does not apply to financing
7.4Radio✓Are you able to conduct fifteen practice readings during the program?Yes · I would need help finding practice subjects · No
7.5Checkbox✓I understand practice readings during the program are with unpaid practice subjects who give written consent, and are not paid client work⚠ Wording pending the counsel ruling on supervised paid readings. If that changes, this is the only field that changes

Section 8 · The faculty pathway

Applicant-facing copy:

Cohort One is the first, and the people in it become the people who mentor the ones who follow.

>

There is nothing to agree to here.

>

I am asking because I would like to know who is interested.
FieldTypeReq.LabelNotes
8.1Radio✓Would you be interested in mentoring or facilitating a later cohort?Yes · Possibly · No · Tell me more first
8.2Info line—DisplayedThis records interest only. It is not a commitment and it does not affect your application.

⚠ Do not add a commitment field here until counsel rules on Section 16. Under Structure B there is no commitment to make and this section stays exactly as written.

Section 9 · Declarations

FieldTypeReq.Label
9.1Checkbox✓Everything I have written here is true and my own work
9.2Checkbox✓I understand this is an application, that submitting it does not create a place, and that twelve places are available
9.3Checkbox✓I understand the tuition is $14,997, or $12,000 if my Four Worlds Mastery fee is credited

⚠ 9.3 and the Certification Checklist now agree. The founding-rate row has been pulled from the Checklist pending the counsel ruling on the barter structure. If Structure A survives, 9.3 and the Checklist change together or not at all.

9.4Checkbox✓I consent to being contacted about this application by email and phone
9.5Signature✓Type your full name
9.6Date✓Today's dateAuto-fill

CONFIRMATION SCREEN AND EMAIL

Same copy for both.

Thank you.

>

Your application is with me.

>

Applications close Friday 20 November, and I will write to everyone by Monday 30 November.

>

If we speak, I will have read your Noble Energy® Map first.

>

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor

SCREENING NOTES

Internal. Not applicant-facing.

Hard stops

Time zone beyond roughly six hours of Eastern, unless 7.1 is confirmed anyway and the applicant has raised it themselves.

Any of the three intensive boxes at 7.1 left unchecked.

6.1 unchecked, which is a form validation failure rather than a judgment.

Flags for the interview rather than for rejection

Never charged for their work. 2.7 No and 2.8 empty. Not disqualifying, and the practice plan artifact matters more for this candidate than for any other.

No current clients. 2.6 None. The practicum requires fifteen readings and 7.4 tells you whether they know how they will find them.

"I am not sure" on 7.2. Nine hours a week through the practice cycles is the real cost and an honest uncertainty is better information than a confident yes.

Anything written in 6.2. Whatever an applicant says unprompted about the clinical boundary is the highest-signal field on the form.

Licensed clinician, 2.3 Yes. Not a flag against. It changes the interview, because a licensed applicant may assume the scope limits do not apply to them and they need to hear that the license and the certification are separate things.

What to look for in 4.2

The question asks about someone who did not get what they came for.

An answer that locates the failure in the client is the wrong answer and it is the one that predicts trouble in Gate 6, where the candidate has to write down what they chose not to say.

An answer that locates it in the practitioner's own map is the right one, and it is what her whole thesis rests on.


BUILD DEPENDENCIES

#ItemBlocksOwner
0⚠ STUDENT CHART ACCESS. Unscoped and it blocks the practicum. Thirty readings per candidate across twelve candidates is roughly 360 generated Maps across the program, and Charles's software is the only source. There is no student access plan anywhere in the build. Either Raz generates all 360, which is an unscoped fulfillment role rather than a task, or students hold software licenses for the duration.Gates 4, 5 and 6, and therefore certification itselfCharles, back next week
1Data handling statement for birth dataSection 5 going liveBrendan, with counsel sighting it
2Counsel ruling on supervised paid readingsField 7.5 wording onlyCounsel
3Counsel ruling on Section 16, Structure A or BNothing on this form. Section 8 is written to survive eitherCounsel
4Confirm the intensives are Eastern Confirmed. Eastern.—Closed
5A Four Worlds Mastery cohort starting Monday 4 January 2027 to serve as Module 1. Two or three earlier Mastery cohorts act as the feeder pool between now and November.Field 3.3 and the whole calendarBrendan
6Chart generation capacity for applicant Maps Decided. Raz generates a chart for every applicant. Dr. Eleanor reads Maps for the interview shortlist only, capped at twenty.Section 5Closed

The applicant timeline, as set

DateWhat
Mon 2 Nov 2026Applications open. Four Worlds Mastery graduates given first access
Fri 20 NovApplications close
2 to 20 NovCharts generated on arrival, rolling, not batched
23 to 27 NovReview. Raz summarises the shortlist Maps
Mon 30 NovNotification
1 to 9 DecInterviews. Shortlist capped at twelve to fifteen
7 to 18 DecOffers and participant agreements
Mon 4 Jan 2027Week One begins
12 Jul to 1 Aug 2027Portfolio submission, staggered
19 Jul to 29 Aug 2027Assessment window
Week of 20 Sep 2027Graduation
Thu 18 to Sun 21 FebIntensive I · The Instrument
Thu 6 to Sun 9 MayIntensive II · The Map
Thu 15 to Sun 18 JulIntensive III · The Reading
19 Jul to 8 AugAssessment window
Week of 9 Aug 2027Graduation

✓ Both calendar collisions resolved. Notification moved off the day before Thanksgiving to Monday 30 November. Intensive II moved off the final day of Passover to 6 to 9 May, which sits in week 18.

Chart reading is split three ways, matching how her report pipeline already works. Raz generates a chart for every applicant, on arrival rather than in a batch. Raz then summarises the shortlist Maps. Dr. Eleanor reads the summary and the chart before each interview, which is the same sequence as a report: the pipeline produces, she reviews. The applicant-facing copy in Section 5 already scopes this correctly, since it promises a reading before we speak rather than a reading for everyone who applies.

⚠ One consequence to settle, and it is a one-line decision. The internal note claiming every applicant receives something of value is only true if every applicant receives their chart. Recommendation: send it. It is already generated, it is the applicant's own data, it costs one automation, and it leaves a declined applicant holding something real rather than a rejection. If that is not wanted, delete the value claim rather than leaving it unsupported.


End of specification. Sales page next.

Invitation Emails

Four emails, in full, with send dates.

For: The team


Certification Cohort One · January 2027

Prepared for Brendan McCauley, Growing Entrepreneur, LLC · 2026-08-05

First email needed on or before Tuesday 11 August 2026.


WHY THIS IS A SEQUENCE AND NOT ONE EMAIL

The cohort finishing 11 August is being asked to wait until 2 November to apply, for a program starting 4 January.

That is nearly five months between the invitation and the application. One email in August asking someone to remember something in November will not survive the gap.

So the approach is three touches, and each one has a different job.

#WhenJobAsk
1On or before 11 Aug, at Mastery completionTell them it exists and that they have first accessJoin a first-access list. Not apply
2Monday 26 OctoberApplications open in a week. Tell them what to prepareReply if they have a question
3Monday 2 NovemberApplications are openApply

Two audiences, not one list

Correcting this document's own earlier assumption. It said Email 1 is reused with one line changed for every cohort. That is wrong, and the reason is the gap.

Audience AAudience B
WhoThe cohort finishing 11 AugustThe cohort filling from Sunday's masterclass
Distance to applicationsRoughly twelve weeksWeeks, possibly days
The problem the email solvesThe gap. Silence after Mastery reads as nothing happeningMomentum. They are still warm and the ask can be direct
What the copy must doExplain the wait, and earn permission to go quietCarry straight on from what they just finished
Email1A, below1B, below

Audience A needs a reason for the delay. Audience B has no delay to explain, and giving them one invents a problem they do not have. Both then join the same first-access list and receive Emails 2 and 3.

⚠ Email 1 deliberately does not describe the practicum. Dependency 0, student chart access, is unresolved, and the practicum is the part of the program that depends on it. Nothing in this sequence promises a number of readings. That stays out until Charles answers.


EMAIL 1A · Audience A · on or before 11 August

To: Four Worlds Mastery graduates, cohort completing 11 August

From: Dr. Eleanor

Send: the day after their final session

Subject line, primary

There is a level above Mastery, and you have first access

Alternates

You have finished Mastery. Here is what comes next.

I am certifying twelve people, and you are on the list first


You finished.

I want you to sit with that for a few days before you read the rest of this, because five weeks in the Four Worlds changes what you notice, and that change keeps arriving after the calls stop.

When you are ready, here is what comes next.

I am running a certification.

Eight months, twelve people, and it teaches the thing I have never taught outside my own practice.

How to read a person's Noble Energy® Maps.

Not how to understand the Four Worlds, which you now do.

How to sit with another human being, read their Maps across all four Worlds, and tell them something they can act on.

I have been reading these Maps for over fifty years, and this is the first time I am teaching someone else to read them.

That is what this is.

A few things you should know now rather than later.

I teach all of it myself.

Your mentor sessions are with me, six of them, one to one.

The cohort is twelve, and twelve is not a marketing number, it is how many people I can mentor properly.

And your Mastery investment carries forward.

Your $2,997 is credited in full, so your tuition is $12,000.

You also skip the first five weeks, because you have already done them.

Paid in full, direct to us, that is $10,500.

Across seven monthly payments it is $1,715 a month, and there is a financing route as well if that suits you better.

The dates.

Applications open Monday 2 November and close Friday 20 November.

The cohort begins Monday 4 January, assessment runs through August, and you graduate in September 2027.

There are three intensives, Thursday to Sunday, eleven to five Eastern, and everything is virtual.

Why I am writing now if applications are months away.

Because you should be first, and because I would rather you had time to think about it than a deadline to react to.

There is nothing to decide today.

If you want to be told first when applications open, add your name here.

[ Add my name to the first-access list ]

That is all it does.

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor


This version is for Audience A only. A cohort finishing closer to November gets Email 1B instead, not a reworded 1A.


EMAIL 1B · Audience B · at their Mastery completion

To: Four Worlds Mastery graduates from the cohort fed by Sunday's masterclass

From: Dr. Eleanor

Send: the day after their final session

Subject line, primary

You have the Four Worlds. Now learn to read them in someone else.

Alternates

What comes after Mastery, and it starts in January

Twelve people, and applications open next month


You finished.

Take a few days with it, because five weeks in the Four Worlds keeps arriving after the calls stop.

Then read this, because the next thing is close and I would rather you heard it from me while Mastery is still in your hands.

I am certifying practitioners.

Eight months, twelve people, and it teaches the one thing I have never taught outside my own practice.

How to read a person's Noble Energy® Maps.

You now understand the Four Worlds.

This is how you sit with another human being, read their Maps across all four, and tell them something they can act on.

I have been reading these Maps for over fifty years, and this is the first time I am teaching someone else to read them.

A few things to know.

I teach all of it myself.

Your mentor sessions are with me, six of them, one to one.

The cohort is twelve, and twelve is not a marketing number, it is how many people I can mentor properly.

Your Mastery investment carries forward.

Your $2,997 is credited in full, so your tuition is $12,000.

You also skip the first five weeks, because you have just done them.

The dates.

Applications open Monday 2 November and close Friday 20 November.

The cohort begins Monday 4 January, assessment runs through August, and you graduate in September 2027.

Three intensives, Thursday to Sunday, eleven to five Eastern, all of it virtual.

One thing to be clear about.

It is an application and an interview, not a purchase.

I read your Noble Energy® Maps before we speak, so if we talk it will be a reading rather than an interview.

Applications open in a few weeks, and I want you on the list before anything is public.

[ Add my name to the first-access list ]

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor


What 1B does not do, deliberately. It does not explain a delay, because there is not one. It does not ask them to keep practicing between now and then, because they are still practicing. And it does not carry 1A's "why I am writing now if applications are months away" section at all, which is the whole difference between the two.


EMAIL 2 · Monday 26 October

To: the first-access list

Send: Monday 26 October, one week before applications open

Subject line

Applications open next Monday. Two things to have ready.


Applications for the certification open next Monday, 2 November, and close on Friday 20 November.

Twelve places.

Two things are worth having ready before you sit down to it, because one of them takes longer than people expect.

The first is your birth time.

The application asks for your birth date, your birth time, and your birth place, because I read your Noble Energy® Map before we speak.

If you make it to the interview, that conversation is a reading rather than an interview.

Birth time matters more than most people think.

Two minutes changes the Moon.

So if you are not certain of yours, this is the week to find your birth certificate or ask the person who was there.

If you cannot find it, apply anyway and tell me so.

The second is three short answers.

The application asks you three questions and holds you to about 150 words each.

The one that matters most asks you about someone you worked with who did not get what they came for, and what you think was missing.

I am not looking for a right answer.

I am looking at where you look for the answer.

The rest, briefly.

Applications close 20 November, I write to everyone by 25 November, interviews run 1 to 9 December, and the cohort begins 4 January.

Your Mastery credit brings tuition to $12,000, and you begin at week seven rather than week one.

Paid in full, direct to us, that is $10,500. Across seven monthly payments it is $1,715 a month. Financing is available through our partner at $12,000 to the lender, and the paid-in-full discount does not apply to it.

If you have a question you would rather ask before you apply, reply to this and I will answer it myself.

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor


EMAIL 3 · Monday 2 November

To: the first-access list

Send: Monday 2 November, morning Eastern

Subject line

Applications are open


Applications are open.

[ Apply for Cohort One ]

They close on Friday 20 November.

Twelve places, and if they fill, later applications go to the waitlist for the following cohort.

I am not going to raise the cap.

Twelve is how many people I can mentor myself, and the mentoring is the part that makes this worth doing.

Your Mastery credit is applied automatically once you tell me on the form that you have completed it.

The application takes about twelve minutes and asks for your birth time, so have that to hand.

I will read your Map before we speak.

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor


MECHANICS

ItemDetail
First-access listA tag in GoHighLevel, not a new form. One field, their email, already on file
SegmentFour Worlds Mastery purchasers, all cohorts, excluding refunds
Email 1A triggerManual send, day after the 11 August cohort's final session
Email 1B triggerManual send, day after each later cohort's final session. If a cohort finishes after 2 November, 1B is not a pre-announcement and needs a different close
Emails 2 and 3Scheduled to the first-access tag only, not the whole Mastery list
Public pageStays unpublished until the first-access list has had Email 3. First access should mean something
Reply handlingEmails 2 and 3 invite a direct reply. Somebody other than her triages, and she answers only what needs her

THE THREE DECISIONS, SETTLED

✓ DECIDED. The public page goes live three or four days after Email 3. First access is a fact rather than a claim.

✓ DECIDED. Affordability is answered by financing and by the paid-in-full discount, and the price stays plainly stated in 1A, 1B and 3. Financing carries the affordability message, not the monthly plan. Anyone who cannot pay in full is pointed at financing, and the seven-payment plan reads as the option for someone who would rather not take a credit inquiry.

✓ DECIDED. Manifest Your Dreams attendees with no Mastery get a separate email. Their route is Mastery first, so the offer is Mastery with the certification named as what it leads to. Not mixed into this sequence, and not written yet.


✓ DECIDED on Dependency 0. Emails 1A and 1B send. They promise no readings and no numbers, and the cost of waiting is a five-month gap becoming six. Email 3 holds until Charles answers on student chart access, because Email 3 points at a page that does make the promise.

✓ DECIDED. The Checklist is at v6 and now agrees with the calendar, so a recipient who replies can be sent it.


End of sequence. Email 1 is the only item with an August date on it.

Pricing And Payment

Three routes and the one rule.

For: Everyone


Version 1 · 6 August 2026


What it costs

StandardIf they already did Four Worlds Mastery
Tuition$14,997$12,000

Four Worlds Mastery is included as the first five weeks. Someone who already did it has their $2,997 credited in full and starts at week seven.

Most of the first cohort will be in the second column, because we are inviting Mastery graduates first.

Three ways to pay

RouteStandardWith the credit
Paid in full, direct to us$13,497$10,500
Seven monthly payments7 × $2,1437 × $1,715
Third-party financing, paid to the lender$14,997$12,000

Paid in full takes $1,500 off. The monthly plan is the plain division with nothing added.

The one rule that has to be stated everywhere

The discount is for money paid directly to us.

Financing is also a payment in full, made by the lender, and the discount does not apply to it.

Without that line, every applicant takes the financing and the discount together.

Which route to point people at

Anyone who cannot pay in full is pointed at financing.

The monthly plan is for someone who would rather not have a credit check, not for someone who cannot afford it.

What it works out to per hour

296 hours at $14,997 is about $50 an hour.

An accredited coach certification is typically around 150 hours for roughly $10,000, which is about $65 an hour.

This is not cheap. It is less per hour than the accredited alternative, and the four things it adds are the founder teaching all of it, a cap of twelve, mentor sessions with her, and a graduate leaving with a product that already has a price on it.

After the credential

Specialization, one of four niches$3,000 to $5,000
Annual renewalNot set

There is no founding rate

It was withdrawn on 6 August 2026. Everyone pays standard tuition. Graduates of the first cohort who go on to mentor the second are paid separately as contractors.

For counsel.

Participant Agreement

Twenty-one sections plus the questions.

For: Counsel

A draft, not for signing. Not simplified, because simplifying legal language breaks it.

What is below

The attempt cap

Why the rule is drawn here

There is no opt-out, and that is the improvement

During the Program

On certification

What the license does not permit

Version obligation

The Subject Roster

8 sections, about 4,217 words. This is a long document.

Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps

Noble Sciences, LLC · Noble Energy® Wellness

Cohort One · October 2026 to May 2027

Draft 2 · Section 16 dual-structured, appeal route settled, revocation narrowed


⚠ THIS IS A DRAFT AND IS NOT FOR EXECUTION.

Prepared by Growing Entrepreneur, LLC for review by counsel retained by Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner and Marvin Portner.

It is written to state commercial and programmatic intent in plain language so that counsel can draft enforceable terms. It is not legal drafting. Every clause marked ⚠ contains a decision or a risk that counsel must resolve rather than approve. Section 21 lists the questions that need answers before a version can be executed.

Written to her copy rules, so that whatever survives review reads in her register.


1. PARTIES AND PROGRAM

This Agreement is between Noble Sciences, LLC, referred to as the Program, and the individual named below, referred to as the Participant.

The Program is the Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps certification, an eight-month professional certification of approximately 296 hours, running from 4 January 2027 to graduation in the week of 20 September 2027.

Participation is limited to twelve people in Cohort One.

⚠ Counsel: confirm the contracting entity. Noble Sciences, LLC holds the published copyrights. Noble Energy® Wellness is used as a trading name across current assets. The marks and the 1999 Rave Life Sciences agreement bear on which entity can license what.

2. WHAT THE PROGRAM PROVIDES

Module 1Four Worlds Mastery, five weeks, live
Intensive I · The InstrumentThursday 19 to Sunday 22 November 2026, 11:00 AM to 5:00 PM daily, virtual
Intensive II · The MapThursday 28 to Sunday 31 January 2027, same hours, virtual
Intensive III · The ReadingThursday 15 to Sunday 18 April 2027, same hours, virtual
Live group callsSeven, two hours each, monthly
Mentor sessionsSix, thirty minutes each, with Dr. Eleanor
Recorded contentApproximately thirty hours, self-paced, for the duration of the Program
Portfolio submissionStaggered, 12 July to 1 August 2027, three windows
Assessment window19 July to 29 August 2027
GraduationWeek of 20 September 2027

Week One begins Monday 4 January 2027.

All live instruction is delivered by Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner, Ph.D., with named faculty for defined segments.

⚠ Counsel: the Program should reserve the right to substitute faculty and to move a date on notice, without that becoming a refund trigger. Draft accordingly.

3. TUITION AND PAYMENT

PathTuition
New Participant, Four Worlds Mastery included as Module 1$14,997
Participant who has already completed Four Worlds Mastery, $2,997 credited in full, starting at Week Seven$12,000

Payment options are payment in full at enrollment, a plan of seven monthly payments, or third-party financing arranged by the Participant.

Tuition covers the Program through graduation, regardless of when payments complete.

The seven-payment plan runs from January to July and the Program runs to graduation in September.

Completing the payment plan does not end the Participant's enrollment, and the assessment period, the oral defense and graduation are covered by the tuition already paid.

⚠ Counsel: and the question this raises. A Participant in remediation at Gate 5 or Gate 6 has already paid in full.

Does a further attempt carry any cost? The Program's intent is that the first further attempt at any gate is included in tuition, and that a second further attempt, where one is permitted at all, carries a stated fee.

Please set the fee or rule that there is none. A candidate who has paid $14,997 and is told at the point of failure that a resit costs money is the most likely complaint in this Program, and it is cheaper to answer it in the agreement than in an email in September.

The attempt cap

Two further attempts at any gate, and no more.

The first further attempt is included in tuition.

A second further attempt, where the Program permits one at all, carries a stated fee.

After a second further attempt the Participant receives a statement of completion of coursework, which is not a certification and confers no rights under Section 12.

⚠ Why the cap exists, and why it is in the agreement rather than in policy.

Without a cap the standard becomes a function of persistence rather than competence.

A candidate who keeps paying could resit indefinitely until the marking gives way, and that is the failure mode of every credential that does not have one.

And the cap protects Dr. Eleanor as much as it protects the standard.

Gate 6 is assessed by her alone in Cohort One, because nobody else holds the credential yet.

By week thirty-one she has taught that candidate for eight months, mentored them one to one six times, read their charts, and watched them learn.

The candidate has paid $14,997.

Without a cap, she is the person who has to keep saying no, repeatedly, to somebody she knows well.

That is not a position to put a founder in, and it is not a position from which a standard survives.

A stated cap means the answer is the agreement's rather than hers, and that is the difference between a boundary and a refusal.

It also puts the pressure in the right place. A gate with unlimited attempts pressures the person marking rather than the person being marked.

There is no founding rate. It was withdrawn permanently on 6 August 2026 in favor of standard tuition for every Participant, with Cohort One graduates engaged and paid separately as contractors when Cohort Two runs. That is Structure B in Section 16, and it is settled rather than open.

4. ADMISSION

Admission is by application and interview.

Submitting an application does not create a place, and payment is not accepted before an offer is made.

The Program may decline any application without stating a reason.

⚠ Counsel: confirm that a stated policy of declining without reason is safe in the jurisdictions where the Program will advertise.

5. WITHDRAWAL, DEFERRAL AND REFUND

⚠ This section is intent only. Counsel drafts the operative terms.

The Program's intent is as follows.

A Participant who withdraws before Week One receives a full refund less an administrative fee.

A Participant who withdraws after Week One and before Intensive I receives a partial refund on a stated schedule.

A Participant who withdraws after Intensive I is liable for the full tuition, and the Program may permit deferral to a later cohort in place of refund.

Deferral is at the Program's discretion, is available once, and carries no additional tuition if taken to the next cohort.

A Participant who completes all coursework but does not satisfy the assessment gates is not withdrawing and is not entitled to a refund. That situation is governed by Section 7.

⚠ Counsel: several states regulate refund schedules for programs of this length and price, and some require a stated pro-rata formula. Confirm what applies where the Program advertises.

6. COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS

Certification requires all of the following.

Completion of every logged session requirement, being twelve readings received from a peer, twelve readings given to a peer, twelve peer group sessions, eleven Practice Interest Group meetings, six mentor sessions, fifteen practicum readings, and three submitted portfolio readings.

Completion of every required artifact listed on the Certification Checklist, which is incorporated into this Agreement by reference.

Satisfaction of all six assessment gates.

Gate 5, the report portfolio, is marked by the Program's report marker against the Four Worlds Report Template Specification.

Gate 6, the reading portfolio and oral defense, is assessed by Dr. Eleanor.

7. ASSESSMENT, REMEDIATION AND APPEAL

Assessment is against published rubrics supplied to the Participant at the start of the Program.

A Participant who does not satisfy a gate is given the reasons in writing and one further attempt at that gate.

An appeal against a gate decision is decided by Marvin Portner, M.D., in consultation with Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner and not decided by her.

This holds for Cohort One and for any later cohort in which Dr. Eleanor is the original assessor.

And the reasoning belongs in the clause rather than behind it. Marvin Portner and Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner are married and are equal partners in the Program. An appeal structure in which every decision under appeal was made by his wife is not an independent review, and it would not survive being tested.

Gate 5 is therefore marked by the Program's report marker against the Template Specification, and countersigned by Dr. Eleanor rather than marked by her. That produces at least one gate where the substantive decision was not hers, and it is the gate most likely to be appealed, because it is the one with a written standard to argue against.

⚠ Counsel: confirm whether countersignature preserves the independence of the appeal, or whether it collapses it. If countersignature is a problem, the alternative is that the marker's decision stands and Dr. Eleanor does not sign at all.

⚠ Counsel: the appeal route is settled and needs drafting, not deciding. Fix the number of attempts, the interval between them, whether a remediation fee applies, and the time limit for lodging an appeal. A Participant who has paid $14,997 and fails a terminal gate is the most likely source of a dispute in this Program.

A Participant who completes the coursework without satisfying the gates receives a statement of completion of coursework, which is not a certification and confers no rights under Section 12.

8. SCOPE OF PRACTICE

The Participant acknowledges and agrees to the following, and this acknowledgment survives the Program.

Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner is a licensed clinical psychologist.

Certification under this Program does not confer any clinical, psychological, medical, or counseling license or qualification, and the Participant will not be a licensed clinician by reason of holding it.

A certified practitioner will not do any of the following.

Diagnose, treat, or advise on any medical or psychological condition.

Represent the work as clinical, psychological, or medical care.

Make claims about health outcomes, or read a Noble Energy® Map to decide a medical question.

Continue a reading once clinical material appears.

And a certified practitioner will do the following.

Refer the person to a licensed clinician, and tell the person why.

9. REFERRAL OBLIGATION

The Participant will hold a referral list before conducting a first reading, containing at least one licensed mental health clinician, one physician, and the crisis service number for each jurisdiction where the Participant's clients live.

The Participant will follow the Program's Referral Protocol, which is supplied separately and is incorporated by reference.

The Participant will record that a referral was made, to what category of professional, and on what date, and will not record the clinical content.

⚠ Counsel: the Referral Protocol is under separate review by Dr. Eleanor as clinician and then by counsel. This Agreement should not be executed before that Protocol is settled, because this clause incorporates it.

10. JURISDICTIONAL COMPLIANCE

Reporting duties for suspected harm to a child or a vulnerable adult are set by the jurisdiction where the Participant practices, and they differ in who is obliged to report.

In some jurisdictions the duty falls on every adult, regardless of profession or license.

The Participant is responsible for knowing the duty that applies where they practice, and for complying with it.

The Participant confirms this before conducting a first reading, and again at each annual renewal.

⚠ Counsel: confirm whether the Program takes on any duty by requiring this confirmation, and whether a per-jurisdiction annex should be supplied or deliberately not supplied.

11. PRACTICUM: PRACTICE SUBJECTS AND CONSENT

The fifteen practicum readings are conducted with practice subjects.

A practice subject is not a client, is not charged a fee, and is told in writing that the Participant is a candidate in training and is not certified.

Each practice subject signs a consent form supplied by the Program before their birth data is collected.

The Participant does not represent the practicum reading as a professional service and does not use it to solicit paid work during the Program.

⚠ Counsel, and this is one of the two questions that matters most. A Participant graduates having never charged for a reading, and then charges $750. The Program is considering whether one or two of the fifteen become supervised paid readings late in the Program. That change would require supervision language here and would very likely require the insurance answer in Section 19 first. See Section 21, questions 4 and 5.

11A. YOUR OWN MAP AS COHORT MATERIAL

The Participant's own Noble Energy® Maps are the material the cohort learns on.

Peer readings during the Program are conducted on the charts of the twelve people in the cohort.

The Participant's chart is read by their dyad partner, for the readings the Participant receives and gives.

It is read in a peer group session only when the Participant is present in that session.

No absent person's chart is read or discussed in a peer group at any time.

What is said in a dyad stays in the dyad.

A reading of the Participant's chart may appear in another candidate's written practice work, under the Participant's initials only, and never with birth data attached.

Every other participant is bound by Section 14 in respect of the Participant's chart, which means initials only, no birth data in any derived material, and no description of personal circumstances.

Why the rule is drawn here

Peer group practice happens on the chart of somebody sitting in the room.

That person can say whether the reading landed, which is the whole reason the cohort's own charts are used rather than strangers'.

A reading discussed in the absence of the person read is neither checkable nor consented to in any meaningful way, so it does not happen.

There is no opt-out, and that is the improvement

An earlier draft carried an opt-out, because a chart read by eleven people in the Participant's absence was a great deal to ask somebody to agree to.

With the rule drawn as above there is nothing left to opt out of.

The dyad reading cannot be declined, because receiving readings is a requirement of the Program.

The peer group reading only happens with the Participant in the room, which is participation rather than exposure.

So the opt-out is withdrawn, and both this clause and the application form are simpler for it.

⚠ Counsel: what remains to review is narrower than before. A candidate's chart appearing in another candidate's written practice work, under initials, with no birth data and no personal circumstances. Section 14 already governs that, so the question is whether Section 14 is sufficient or whether this clause needs its own consent line.

12. TRADEMARK LICENSE AND LICENSED METHOD

During the Program

The Participant does not produce reports for paying clients.

Reports required for the practicum and the portfolio are produced through the Program's central fulfillment.

This is a training requirement and not a restriction on trade.

On certification

The Program grants the Participant a license that is revocable, non-exclusive, non-transferable, and non-sublicensable, to do the following.

Use the designation Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps.

Use the certification mark in the manner set out in the Program's mark usage guidance.

Use the Licensed Document Set to produce Noble Energy® Maps reports for the Participant's own clients.

The Licensed Document Set is a versioned package comprising the Four Worlds Report Template Specification, the Channel Priorities spreadsheet, the Channel Master document, the Beyond Human Design source text supplied for this purpose, the Reading Template, and the glyph color files.

What the license does not permit

Creating, selling, or distributing any derivative product, course, workbook, assessment, or instrument based on the Licensed Document Set.

Teaching, training, or certifying any other person in the method.

Publishing, sharing, or reproducing the Licensed Document Set in any form.

Using Noble Energy® Maps, Dr. Eleanor®, the Mandala of Synthesis®, or any other mark of the Program on the Participant's own products or services without a separate written license.

Version obligation

The Participant will operate on the version of the Specification in force and will adopt any revision issued by the Program within a stated period of issue.

⚠ Counsel: this obligation exists because the Program has already withdrawn a claim that appeared in an earlier version of the Specification. A graduate operating on a superseded version would continue publishing a withdrawn claim under the Program's mark. Set the adoption period and the consequence of not adopting.

⚠ Counsel, and this is the hardest clause in the Agreement. The Licensed Document Set is the Program's entire interpretive method in six files. Practical recovery of those files after revocation is close to impossible. The Program's protections are the mark, the designation, the directory listing, and revocation of the right to use them. Draft on that basis rather than on a return-or-destroy premise that cannot be enforced.

⚠ Counsel: the license rests on the marks, which rest on the 1999 Rave Life Sciences agreement. This section cannot be finalised before that review is complete.

13. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

All Program materials remain the property of Noble Sciences, LLC or its licensors.

Nothing in this Agreement transfers ownership of anything.

Work the Participant creates during the Program, including reports, case write-ups, and the elective, remains the Participant's own, subject to Section 14 and to the license limits in Section 12.

⚠ Counsel: the Program will want a limited right to use anonymized Participant work for teaching and marketing. Draft the grant, and match its anonymization standard to Section 14.

14. ANONYMIZATION AND CONFIDENTIALITY

The Participant applies the following standard to every derived material, including case write-ups, marketing, teaching, and social content.

Birth date, birth time, and birth place are never published, quoted, or reproduced in any form.

A person whose chart is discussed is identified by initials only.

Personal circumstances and personal history are not described.

The Participant treats everything shared by a peer, a practice subject, or a client as confidential.

The Subject Roster

The Participant keeps one document, the Subject Roster, that does carry the full name and contact details of every person they read.

A practitioner cannot follow up with a person identified only by initials, so the Roster is a professional necessity rather than an exception to the standard.

The Roster is never submitted to the Program, is not requested at any gate, and is held by the Participant alone.

Everything outside the Roster, including the submitted Reading Log, uses a Program-issued Subject ID and initials.

The Participant holds the Roster securely, retains it only while there is a professional reason to, and removes a person on request.

⚠ Counsel: two questions on this clause. Whether the Program carries any obligation in respect of personal data a Participant holds in the Roster, given that the Program requires them to collect it. And whether the practice subject consent form needs to state that the Participant will keep their name and contact details, and for how long.

15. RECORDING

Live sessions are recorded.

Recordings are used to train practitioners, to build Program materials, and in promotional material.

The Participant may attend with their camera off.

The Participant may ask for a segment featuring them to be removed at any time, and the Program will remove it.

16. THE FACULTY PATHWAY

Settled. Structure B.

The Participant enrolls at standard tuition, $14,997, or $12,000 with the Four Worlds Mastery credit.

No commitment of future service is attached to tuition, and there is no founding rate.

Separately, and after certification, the Program may offer a mentor or facilitator engagement to selected graduates under an independent contractor agreement at a stated rate.

Those two agreements are independent and either may exist without the other.

Why this rather than a discounted rate in exchange for service. A tuition reduction given in exchange for future work is a barter arrangement carrying taxable value on both sides, and it supports a worker classification argument. A paid mentor is a contractor the Program can hold to a standard. A discounted student who owes service is someone the Program has to chase.

⚠ Counsel: the contractor agreement is a separate document and is not drafted here. It is needed before Cohort Two enrolls, not before Cohort One does.

17. ANNUAL RENEWAL AND STANDING

Certification is renewed annually.

Renewal requires a stated minimum of logged readings, stated continuing education, affirmation of the Code of Conduct, confirmation under Section 10, and operation on the Specification version in force.

⚠ Counsel: the renewal fee and the reading minimum are not yet set. Confirm whether renewal terms may be varied by the Program on notice, or must be fixed at the outset.

18. REVOCATION

Certification may be revoked for any of the following, and for no other reason.

Misrepresentation of scope of practice, being any breach of Section 8.

Misuse of the certification mark, the designation, or any other mark of the Program, or any breach of the license limits in Section 12.

Failure to renew under Section 17.

Failure to maintain the jurisdictional compliance confirmation required by Section 10.

On revocation the former practitioner ceases all use of the designation, the certification mark, and every mark of the Program, and is removed from the practitioner directory.

⚠ Counsel: the grounds are deliberately enumerated and closed rather than referring to a general code. The Program has no Code of Conduct and no complaints procedure, so an open-ended revocation right would be difficult to exercise and easy to challenge. These four grounds are each objectively determinable.

⚠ Counsel: the Program still needs a notice and cure step, a right to respond, and a decision-maker. The appeal structure in Section 7, Marvin Portner in consultation with Dr. Eleanor, is available and is the obvious route here too.

A full Code of Conduct and a complaints and misconduct procedure are a Cohort Two build. When they exist, this section can be widened to reference them.

19. INSURANCE, INDEMNITY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

⚠ Entirely for counsel. Nothing is drafted here.

Three questions the Program needs answered rather than clauses it needs proposed.

Whether the Program requires the Participant to hold professional liability insurance as a condition of certification, and from what point.

Whether the Program's own coverage extends to practicum activity conducted by uncertified candidates under its mark.

How the answer changes if any practicum reading becomes paid, per Section 11.

20. GENERAL

⚠ For counsel: governing law, venue, dispute resolution, notices, assignment, entire agreement, severability, amendment, and electronic signature.

21. QUESTIONS FOR COUNSEL, IN PRIORITY ORDER

#QuestionBlocks
1Structure A or B CLOSED. Structure B. Standard tuition for everyone, contractors paid separately. No question remainsSection 3, Section 16
2Differential-becomes-payable remedy CLOSED. Structure A withdrawn, so the remedy does not arise—
3Appeal route Settled. Appeals decided by Marvin Portner, M.D., in consultation with Dr. Eleanor and not by her. Needs drafting only.Section 7
4Should one or two practicum readings be supervised and paid?Sections 11 and 19, and what the sales page may promise
5Must the Participant carry professional liability insurance, and does the Program's coverage reach practicum activity?Section 19, and question 4
6aDoes a further gate attempt carry a fee, and if so how much? See Section 3Sections 3 and 7, and the most likely source of complaint
6Refund schedule: what does each advertising jurisdiction require for an eight-month program at this price?Section 5
7Can the license in Section 12 be granted at all before the 1999 Rave Life Sciences review concludes?Section 12, the credential name, and the mark
8Does requiring the Section 10 confirmation create any duty for the Program?Section 10
9What consequence attaches to a graduate not adopting a Specification revision?Section 12
10Is declining an application without stated reason safe as an advertised policy?Section 4
11Confirm the assessment chain, rather than ruling on countersignature in the abstract. Raz marks Gate 5, Dr. Eleanor countersigns, Marvin hears the appeal. Nobody in that chain reviews their own decision. Is that sufficient for independent reviewSections 6, 7 and the defensibility of the credential
12Redline the proposed opt-out in Section 11A. Cohort-peer use is the default, disclosed at application, with an opt-out requiring the candidate to supply their own consenting subjects. Proposal, not questionSection 11A and the application form
13Does the report marker need to hold the credential in order to mark Gate 5? Nobody holds it yet, so in Cohort One nobody canSection 6

THREE DOCUMENTS THIS AGREEMENT INCORPORATES AND WHICH ARE NOT YET FINAL

The Referral Protocol. Drafted, awaiting her clinical review and then counsel. Section 9 depends on it.

The Code of Conduct. Section 18 depends on it. No longer a dependency. Section 18 is narrowed to four enumerated grounds, and the Code becomes a Cohort Two build.

The Certification Checklist. Final at v3. Section 6 depends on it and it is the one that is ready.

And one that does not exist at all. A complaints and misconduct process. No longer blocking, because Section 18 no longer relies on it, but the notice, cure and response steps inside Section 18 still need drafting.


End of draft. Not for execution. Section 21 first.

Client Agreement Template

Twelve clauses a graduate adapts.

For: Counsel, then students


Version 1 · 6 August 2026


ARTIFACT 8 — THE CLIENT AGREEMENT TEMPLATE

Higher priority than the participant agreement, because this document has to contain a template a candidate can adapt. Twelve clause categories, taken as form from the reference template. Every word below is ours or hers.

⚠ DRAFT. For counsel review before it is issued to any candidate. A candidate adapts it and faculty reviews their version at Gate 4.

#ClauseWhat it must state
1Parties and termPractitioner, client, start date, and the number of sessions or the period
2Fee and paymentAmount, when payable, and what it covers. Report and reading priced separately if both are offered
3What the service isA reading of the client's Noble Energy® Maps, and a written report if included
4What the service is notNot clinical, psychological, medical or counseling care. Not diagnosis, treatment or advice on any condition. Not a substitute for care the client is receiving. Clients must be eighteen or older
5Birth dataWhat is collected, that it is required, that it is never published, and how long it is kept
5aName and contact detailsThat the practitioner keeps them in order to deliver the reading and follow up, that they are not published or shared, and that the client may ask to be removed
6ConfidentialityEverything the client says, and everything the chart shows, kept confidential as allowed by law
7Anonymization if the reading is usedInitials only, no birth data, no personal circumstances, and only with the client's separate written consent
8ReferralThat the practitioner will stop and refer if clinical material appears, and that this is not a failure of the reading
9RecordingWhether the session is recorded, for what, and the client's right to decline
10CancellationNotice required, by either party
11Limit of remedySole remedy is return of fees paid. No liability beyond that
12SignaturesClient, practitioner, dates. No guardian line. Clients are eighteen or older

Minors, decided

Graduates do not read for anyone under eighteen. Executive decision, not a counsel question.

Why it is the right line. The Soul Knows material is parent-facing, so unpaid practice subjects will include children the moment a template permits it. An unlicensed graduate reading a child's chart and telling a parent what they see about that child's inner life is the highest-exposure act in the credential. It sits closest to the clinical line, the person being read cannot consent, and the person receiving it is making decisions about someone else's development. She is a licensed clinical psychologist with a parent-facing body of work. Her graduates are not, and the gap between them is widest exactly here.

And it becomes a product rather than a prohibition. Reading for minors moves into the Parents and Children specialization, which is already one of the four niches. Additional training, separate standard, priced separately.

Propagated to: clause 4 as fixed unalterable text, clause 12 with the guardian line removed, the Checklist may-not list, and the sales page.

⚠ Clause 4 is the only clause a candidate may not alter. It is issued as fixed text and Gate 4 checks that it is present and unmodified.


Referral Protocol

When a practitioner stops and refers.

For: Students, you, counsel

Not from your corpus, deliberately. A graduate's threshold has to be more careful than yours.

What is below

THE REFERRAL PROTOCOL, IN FULL

The standing rule

Where the line sits

Category one · Stop the session

Category two · Refer before continuing the work

Category three · Hold the boundary and continue

Before you see anyone

Records

Mandatory reporting

Answering honestly is safe, and here is why that matters

Module 1 · The Four Worlds

Intensive I

Cycle one

Intensive II

Cycle two

Intensive III and assessment

What closes when, at a glance

17 sections, about 1,926 words. This is a long document.

Version 1 · 6 August 2026


THE REFERRAL PROTOCOL, IN FULL

⚠ This protocol is not drawn from Dr. Eleanor's corpus. It is drafted against general helping-profession scope norms, because her own threshold is a licensed clinical psychologist's threshold and yours must be more conservative. She has reviewed it as a clinician. It is standard of care, not doctrine.

The standing rule

You are not a licensed clinician.

Your work is to read a person's Noble Energy® Maps and help them recognize what their design shows them.

Your work is not to assess, diagnose, treat, or manage any condition.

When clinical material appears, your competence is recognizing it and connecting the person to someone qualified, and nothing further.

Where the line sits

A conservative line is the correct line.

You will sometimes refer someone who did not need it, and that error costs a conversation.

The opposite error costs more, and it is the error a practitioner makes when they feel capable.

Feeling capable is not the test. The test is whether you hold a license.

Category one · Stop the session

Stop the reading, address only what is in front of you, and connect the person to emergency or crisis support before the session ends.

Any indication that the person intends to harm themselves.

Any indication that the person intends to harm someone else.

Any indication that a child or a vulnerable adult is being harmed.

Any state in which the person appears to have lost contact with shared reality, including hearing or seeing what others do not, or holding beliefs that cannot be reasoned with.

Any state in which the person does not appear to know where they are or who you are.

What you do. Stay with them. Say plainly that you are concerned and that you want to get them to someone who can help now. In the United States, call or text 988 with them, or help them reach their own clinician, or call emergency services if there is immediate danger. Do not end the call until they are connected or somebody else is with them.

What you do not do. You do not assess how serious it is. You do not ask what they are planning. You do not agree to keep it between the two of you. You do not continue the reading.

Category two · Refer before continuing the work

Complete the session if it is safe to do so, and do not schedule further work until support is in place.

Active symptoms of a diagnosed condition the person is not currently in treatment for.

Trauma material surfacing with physical distress, dissociation, or loss of the thread of the conversation.

Substance use the person names as out of their control.

Disordered eating, including restriction, purging, or a preoccupation with food or weight that shapes their day.

A recent bereavement, assault, or other acute event.

Any request that you address a medical or psychiatric condition.

Any situation where the person is in someone else's clinical care and is asking you for a second opinion on it.

What you say. That what they have brought is real and important, that it belongs with someone trained for it, and that you would like to help them find that person.

What you do not do. You do not tell them what they have. You do not comment on their treatment, their medication, or their clinician. You do not position the Maps as an alternative to care they are already receiving.

Category three · Hold the boundary and continue

Questions about physical health, symptoms, or diagnosis arising from what a chart shows.

Requests to read a chart to decide a medical question.

Requests to read a child's chart in place of an assessment.

Requests for reassurance that a decision is the right one.

What you say. That the Maps show how their energy is designed to move, and that they do not show what is happening in their body or what they should decide.

Before you see anyone

A referral list, built before your first non-peer reading and confirmed at week eleven. At least one licensed mental health clinician, one physician, and the crisis number for every jurisdiction where your subjects live.

One named person you can consult. A practitioner does not carry this alone, and the moment to arrange it is not the moment you need it.

A client agreement stating what you do and do not do.

Your own support. Reading people surfaces material in the reader. That is expected and it is not a failure.

Records

Note that a referral was made, to what category of professional, and the date.

Do not record the clinical content.

Mandatory reporting

⚠ This cannot be written as one rule and it is not.

Reporting duties for suspected harm to a child or a vulnerable adult are set by the jurisdiction where you practice, and they differ in who is obliged to report.

In some jurisdictions the duty falls on every adult, regardless of profession or license.

You are responsible for knowing the duty that applies where you practice and complying with it.

Your practitioner agreement requires you to confirm this before your first reading and again at each renewal.

Answering honestly is safe, and here is why that matters

Question six on every milestone asks what you chose not to say.

You will sometimes answer it with something you should have referred instead of withheld.

When that happens, we contact you within two days and we work through the referral protocol with you.

It is recorded against the referral competency, so that we know to teach it again.

It is never recorded against you.

I want you to understand the reason plainly.

The same answer at week ten is a lesson, and at week thirty-one it fails the gate.

If you learn to answer question six thinly, we lose the only instrument that finds it early, and you lose the twenty-one weeks in which it could have been taught.

So answer it honestly, including the answers you are not proud of.

That is the whole point of asking eight times.


5. # THE SPINE, WEEK BY WEEK

Week One begins Monday 4 January 2027. Graduation is the week of 20 September.

Reading the columns: Taught is what is delivered. Due is what a candidate submits. Opens and Closes are the practice structures.

Module 1 · The Four Worlds

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
14 to 10 JanFour Worlds Mastery Week 1 · The Spiritual/Archetypal World, live—Skool classroom opens. RC-1 available
211 to 17 JanMastery Week 2 · The Physical/Biological World, liveMastery Week 1 workbookRC-2 available
318 to 24 JanMastery Week 3 · The Emotional/Angelic World, liveMastery Week 2 workbook—
425 to 31 JanMastery Week 4 · The Mental/Waking World, liveMastery Week 3 workbook—
51 to 7 FebMastery Week 5 · Four Worlds Integrated, liveMastery Week 4 workbook—
68 to 14 FebGroup call 1 · the whole cohort, first time. Introductions, log walkthrough, what to bring to Intensive IMastery Week 5 workbook · Four Worlds Assessment, entry · A1, your own Map, first pass · A2, Four Worlds Assessment, entryAll logs explained, none open

Candidates entering with the Mastery credit join at week 6. Group call 1 is their first contact and the reason it moved here.

Intensive I

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
715 to 21 FebINTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT. Thu 18 to Sun 21 Feb, 11:00 to 5:00 Eastern, virtual. Sessions I-1 to I-8—Gates 1 and 2 assessed Sunday afternoon

Cycle one

WkTaughtDueOpens / Closes
8RC-3, RC-4HW-1 Chart anatomy setPeer dyads open, Tier One. Partners assigned
9—HW-2 Your own Map, full Tier One write-up—
10RC-5 · Group call 2 · first readings debriefMilestone 1Mentor session 1, gated on two completed peer readings
11RC-5 continuedHW-3 Nine Centers drill—
11—A9, referral list, confirmed and datedRequired before any non-peer subject reading
12——Practice Interest Group opens. Niche selected
13—Milestone 2 · HW-4 Patterns of Orientation, ten chartsPracticum Tier One opens. Readings 1 to 5
14RC-6 · Group call 3 · the instrument in useA3, Chart Anatomy workbookPeer groups open
15RC-7Milestone 3 · HW-5 Natal wheel setMentor session 2
16RC-7 continuedHW-6 and A6, book report—
17Group call 4 · what to bring to Intensive IIMilestone 4 · A4, Patterns of Orientation workbook · RC-8 must be watchedPracticum Tier One closes. All five logged

Intensive II

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
183 to 9 MayINTENSIVE II · THE MAP. Thu 6 to Sun 9 May. Sessions II-1 to II-8—Gate 3 assessed Sunday afternoon

Cycle two

WkTaughtDueOpens / Closes
19RC-9HW-7 Matrix filter setPracticum Tier Two opens. Readings 6 to 15 · Peer dyads close
20Group call 5 · first Tier Two debriefHW-8 Channel Priority drillMentor session 3
21RC-10Milestone 5 · A7, practice plan draft—
22RC-11HW-9 Two Tier Two reports submitted for formative comment—
23RC-11 continuedA5, Report Production workbookMentor session 4, with the written half page
24Group call 6 · portfolio briefingMilestone 6 · HW-10 Elective proposal—
25RC-12A8, client agreement draftMentor session 5
26—HW-11 Omission rationale, practice attempt on a completed reading—
27—Milestone 7 · A12, elective · A7, practice plan final · A11, mentor evaluationPortfolio window opens. PIG closes · peer groups close · Practicum Tier Two closes, all ten logged · Mentor session 6

Intensive III and assessment

WkDatesTaughtDueOpens / Closes
2812 to 18 JulINTENSIVE III · THE READING. Thu 15 to Sun 18 Jul. Sessions III-1 to III-8Portfolio window A, four candidatesSubmission windows assigned at group call 6
2919 to 25 Jul—Gate 4 pack. All logs and consents · A8 final · A9 · A10, program review · A2, Four Worlds Assessment, exit · Portfolio window BGate 4 assessed. Gate 5 marking begins
3026 Jul to 1 Aug—Portfolio window CGate 5 marking continues
31 to 342 to 29 Aug—Oral defenses, scheduled individually across four weeksGates 5 and 6 assessed
329 to 15 AugGraduation—License issued, directory listing, renewal date set

What closes when, at a glance

StructureOpensClosesTotal
Peer dyads, Tier OneWeek 8Week 1912 received, 12 given
Practice Interest GroupWeek 12Week 2711 meetings
Practicum Tier OneWeek 13Week 175 readings
Peer groupsWeek 14Week 2712 sessions
Practicum Tier TwoWeek 19Week 2710 readings
Mentor sessionsWeek 10Week 276, at weeks 10, 15, 20, 23, 25, 27
MilestonesWeek 10Week 277, at weeks 10, 13, 15, 17, 21, 24, 27
Group callsWeek 6Week 277, at weeks 6, 10, 14, 17, 20, 24, 27
PortfolioWeek 27Week 30, in three staggered windows3 readings

Mentor sessions are at least three weeks apart and the first is gated on two completed peer readings, which is the reference pattern adopted exactly.



6.

Questions For Counsel

Thirteen questions, two closed.

For: Counsel


Version 1 · 6 August 2026


21. QUESTIONS FOR COUNSEL, IN PRIORITY ORDER

#QuestionBlocks
1Structure A or B CLOSED. Structure B. Standard tuition for everyone, contractors paid separately. No question remainsSection 3, Section 16
2Differential-becomes-payable remedy CLOSED. Structure A withdrawn, so the remedy does not arise—
3Appeal route Settled. Appeals decided by Marvin Portner, M.D., in consultation with Dr. Eleanor and not by her. Needs drafting only.Section 7
4Should one or two practicum readings be supervised and paid?Sections 11 and 19, and what the sales page may promise
5Must the Participant carry professional liability insurance, and does the Program's coverage reach practicum activity?Section 19, and question 4
6aDoes a further gate attempt carry a fee, and if so how much? See Section 3Sections 3 and 7, and the most likely source of complaint
6Refund schedule: what does each advertising jurisdiction require for an eight-month program at this price?Section 5
7Can the license in Section 12 be granted at all before the 1999 Rave Life Sciences review concludes?Section 12, the credential name, and the mark
8Does requiring the Section 10 confirmation create any duty for the Program?Section 10
9What consequence attaches to a graduate not adopting a Specification revision?Section 12
10Is declining an application without stated reason safe as an advertised policy?Section 4
11Confirm the assessment chain, rather than ruling on countersignature in the abstract. Raz marks Gate 5, Dr. Eleanor countersigns, Marvin hears the appeal. Nobody in that chain reviews their own decision. Is that sufficient for independent reviewSections 6, 7 and the defensibility of the credential
12Redline the proposed opt-out in Section 11A. Cohort-peer use is the default, disclosed at application, with an opt-out requiring the candidate to supply their own consenting subjects. Proposal, not questionSection 11A and the application form
13Does the report marker need to hold the credential in order to mark Gate 5? Nobody holds it yet, so in Cohort One nobody canSection 6


THREE DOCUMENTS THIS AGREEMENT INCORPORATES AND WHICH ARE NOT YET FINAL

The Referral Protocol. Drafted, awaiting her clinical review and then counsel. Section 9 depends on it.

The Code of Conduct. Section 18 depends on it. No longer a dependency. Section 18 is narrowed to four enumerated grounds, and the Code becomes a Cohort Two build.

The Certification Checklist. Final at v3. Section 6 depends on it and it is the one that is ready.

And one that does not exist at all. A complaints and misconduct process. No longer blocking, because Section 18 no longer relies on it, but the notice, cure and response steps inside Section 18 still need drafting.


End of draft. Not for execution. Section 21 first.

What gets made, by when, by whom.

Production Schedule

830 hours and six places it breaks.

For: The team


What is below

Block A · Enrollment · due Mon 2 November 2026 · 12 weeks

Block B · Day one · due Mon 4 January 2027 · 21 weeks

Block C · Intensive I · due Thu 11 February 2027 · 27 weeks

Block D · Cycle one · Feb to Apr 2027

Block E · Intensive II · due Thu 29 April 2027 · ⚠ BLOCKED

Block F · Intensive III · due Thu 8 July 2027

Block G · Assessment and graduation · due Mon 12 July 2027

Totals

Break 1 · Nobody owns 830 hours

Break 2 · The Referral Protocol is upstream of counsel and has not gone to her

Break 3 · The gate matrix lists have a hard date of 1 March 2027

Break 4 · July 2027 is over capacity, and this one needs a calendar change

The fix, APPROVED and applied 6 August 2026

Break 5 · The recorded core is front-loaded into the enrollment window

Break 6 · Two proofing passes are on the critical path and no editor is named

15 sections, about 1,822 words. This is a long document.

Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps · Cohort One

Working backward from Monday 4 January 2027. Prepared 6 August 2026.


THE HEADLINE

Roughly 768 hours of build between now and 8 July 2027. That is 48 weeks, or sixteen hours a week sustained, with nobody assigned to it.

Roughly 45 hours of Dr. Eleanor on camera, most of it before the cohort exists.

Five dates are hard and one month is over capacity. Both are below.


THE FIXED CALENDAR

DateEventWeeks from now
Tue 11 Aug 2026Mastery Week 5 Integrated, live. Then the four-hour chart class0.7
Mon 2 Nov 2026Enrollment opens12
Fri 20 NovApplications close15
1 to 9 DecInterviews17
7 to 18 DecOffers and agreements19
Mon 4 Jan 2027Week 1. Cohort One begins21
Wk 6, 8 to 14 FebGroup call 127
Wk 7, 18 to 21 FebIntensive I28
Wk 18, 6 to 9 MayIntensive II39
Wk 28, 15 to 18 JulIntensive III49
Wk 28 to 30, 12 Jul to 1 AugPortfolio submission, staggered49 to 51
Wk 29 to 34, 19 Jul to 29 AugAssessment50 to 55
Wk 38, week of 20 Sep 2027Graduation59

Material builds one module ahead. Intensive I material is due by 11 February. Intensive III material is not due until 8 July.


BUILD INVENTORY, BY DUE DATE

Block A · Enrollment · due Mon 2 November 2026 · 12 weeks

ItemHrsOwner
Referral Protocol, her clinical review, then counsel—Her, then counsel
Participant agreement, counsel-cleared, Structure B drafted—Counsel
Practice subject consent form, cohort-peer consent6Counsel
Sales page built in GoHighLevel12Brendan
Application form built, all nine sections, 40 fields10Brendan
Emails 1A, 1B, 2, 3, built and sequenced6Brendan
Birth-data handling statement2Brendan, counsel sighting
Report marker contractor agreement4Brendan
Checklist v11, PDFdone—
Block total40

Block B · Day one · due Mon 4 January 2027 · 21 weeks

ItemHrsOwner
Student handbook, designed and typeset30Cindy
Skool classroom, levels, unlocks, uploads16Brendan
Six logs: Tier One, Tier Two, peer group, PIG, mentor, plus the Gate 4 pack18Brendan
Milestone form and review rubric6Brendan
Tier One protocol, peer-facing and subject-facing10Brendan
Scope statement card2Cindy
RC-1, 3 finished hours18Production · 4.5 hrs her camera
RC-2, 3 finished hours18Production · 4.5 hrs her camera
Block total1189 hrs her camera

Block C · Intensive I · due Thu 11 February 2027 · 27 weeks

ItemHrsOwner
Eight session decks, I-1 to I-848Brendan, her review
Handouts: Mandala, glyph sheet, layer sheet, Type card, nine Center figures, Pattern quality card, color key, displacement one-pager, scripted question cards30Cindy
Gate 1 and Gate 2 assessments, with answer keys16Brendan
Twelve candidate charts, printed and on screen4Raz
RC-3 and RC-4, 5 finished hours30Production · 7.5 hrs her camera
Block total1287.5 hrs her camera

Block D · Cycle one · Feb to Apr 2027

ItemDueHrsOwner
Patterns of Orientation proofing pass1 Mar12Editor, unnamed
Channel Master proofing pass1 Apr20Editor, unnamed
A3 Chart Anatomy workbook, ~24pp8 Mar40Brendan, Cindy
RC-5, 4 finished hours8 Mar24Production · 6 hrs camera, delegable
Twelve peer group prepare-material sets22 Mar24Brendan
RC-6, 2 hrs29 Mar12Production · 3 hrs camera
Four PIG niche introduction sets5 Apr20Brendan, her input
A4 Patterns of Orientation workbook, ~20pp12 Apr36Brendan, Cindy
RC-7, 4 hrs12 Apr24Production · 6 hrs camera, delegable
RC-8, 2 hrs19 Apr12Production · 3 hrs camera
Block total22418 hrs her camera

Block E · Intensive II · due Thu 29 April 2027 · ⚠ BLOCKED

ItemHrsOwner
Four gate matrix membership lists—Charles
Eight session decks, II-1 to II-848Cannot start on four of eight until the lists arrive
Three matrix reference cards4Cindy
Answer keys for the filter drills20Derived entirely from the lists
Gate 3 assessment and key10Derived from the lists
Channel Master coverage map8Brendan
RC-9, 3 hrs, due 3 May18Production · 4.5 hrs camera
RC-10, 1 hr, due 17 May6Production · 1.5 hrs camera
Block total1146 hrs her camera

Block F · Intensive III · due Thu 8 July 2027

ItemDueHrsOwner
A5 Report Production workbook, ~32pp17 May50Brendan, Cindy
Gate 5 marking checklist from Specification §717 May12Brendan. Raz cannot mark without it, and candidates receive it in III-2
RC-11, 3 hrs31 May18Production · 4.5 hrs camera
RC-12, 1 hr14 Jun6Production · 1.5 hrs camera
Eight session decks, III-1 to III-88 Jul48Brendan, her review
Omission rationale form and rubric8 Jul10Brendan
Overlap scoring sheet for III-38 Jul6Brendan
Eight referral scenario cards8 Jul8Brendan
Eclipse tables, cohort birth years8 Jul4Raz
Recorded reading for III-68 Jul—CAPTURE. No other source
Block total1626 hrs her camera

Block G · Assessment and graduation · due Mon 12 July 2027

ItemHrsOwner
Gate 4 pack checklist4Brendan
Gate 6 marking sheet8Brendan
Certificate, mark usage files, license pack20Cindy
Directory listing build12Brendan
Block total44

Totals

Hours
Build, all blocks830
Of which recorded core production186
Dr. Eleanor on camera~46
Cindy, design~200
Editorial, unnamed32

WHERE THE CALENDAR BREAKS

Break 1 · Nobody owns 830 hours

Sixteen to eighteen hours a week, every week, for forty-eight weeks. That is a half-time producer or two people at eight hours.

Currently every line says Brendan or Cindy, and Cindy already has 200 hours of design inside it.

This is the break that causes every other break. Not a scheduling problem, a staffing one, and it needs deciding before November rather than discovering in March.

Break 2 · The Referral Protocol is upstream of counsel and has not gone to her

Enrollment opens in twelve weeks. The participant agreement incorporates the Referral Protocol by reference and cannot be executed before it is settled.

The chain is: her clinical review, then counsel on the agreement, then enrollment copy. Counsel has thirteen questions and a twenty-one section document. Four to eight weeks is realistic, and that is after she has reviewed the Protocol.

Latest safe date for the Protocol to reach her: this week. Not a projection. Twelve weeks minus eight for counsel minus two for revisions leaves two.

Break 3 · The gate matrix lists have a hard date of 1 March 2027

Intensive II material is due 29 April. Four of eight session decks, twenty hours of answer keys and the Gate 3 assessment all derive from the lists.

Roughly 78 of Block E's 114 hours cannot begin until they arrive.

At sixteen hours a week that is five weeks of work. Working back from 29 April with two weeks of contingency: 1 March 2027 is the last date the lists can arrive without compressing Intensive II below feasible.

Charles has seven months. He should be told the date is 1 March, not that it is needed eventually.

Break 4 · July 2027 is over capacity, and this one needs a calendar change

Her committed hours in the four weeks of July 2027:

Hours
Intensive III, 15 to 18 July24
Gate 6 assessment, twelve candidates at ~4.75 hrs each57
Manifest Your Dreams, weekly8
Graduation preparation4
Total, four weeks93

Her working day is 11:00 to 4:30, which is 5.5 hours, so a five-day week is 27.5. Four weeks is 110 hours of total capacity.

93 of 110 hours, on the certification alone, with no readings, no reports, no Mastery cohort, and no rest.

And it is worse than the total suggests, because portfolios arrive at week 30 and Gate 6 is therefore compressed into two weeks: 57 hours across weeks 30 and 31 is 28 hours a week, which exceeds her weekly capacity outright.

The fix, APPROVED and applied 6 August 2026

Stagger portfolio submission across weeks 28, 29 and 30, four candidates per window, assigned at group call 6.

Extend the assessment window to weeks 29 to 34. Gate 6 then runs at roughly nine to ten hours a week across six weeks.

Graduation moves to the week of 20 September 2027.

That decouples Intensive III from Gate 6, which are currently in the same month for no reason other than that the original calendar was built before Gate 6 had an hours estimate.

✓ Applied to the sales page, the application, the Checklist v13, both emails, the spine and the cover. Gate 6 now runs at roughly nine to ten hours a week across six weeks instead of twenty-eight across two.

Break 5 · The recorded core is front-loaded into the enrollment window

RC-1 and RC-2 are due 4 and 11 January. Six finished hours, 36 production hours, nine hours of her on camera.

They fall in the same twelve weeks as the entire enrollment build, and they cannot slip, because a candidate is told to watch RC-1 in week one.

Recommendation: record RC-1 and RC-2 in September, before enrollment work begins. Nine hours of her time in September buys the whole of Block B breathing room.

Break 6 · Two proofing passes are on the critical path and no editor is named

Patterns of Orientation, twelve hours, by 1 March. A4 depends on it and so does RC-9.

Channel Master, twenty hours, by 1 April. Intensive II session II-5 depends on it.

Neither can be done by us without her approval on every change, because in this material a typo and a term are hard to tell apart from outside. And neither should be done by her, because it is thirty-two hours of proofreading.


WHAT IS SAFE

Intensive I and Intensive III material have real slack. 27 and 49 weeks respectively, and neither is blocked.

The capture sessions have ten months of slack against their due date of 8 July, which is the one comfortable number in this document. The risk there is not the calendar, it is that the class happens once.

Blocks A and G are small. 40 and 44 hours.


THE FIVE DATES TO PUT IN A CALENDAR TODAY

DateWhat
This weekReferral Protocol to her
This weekCharles given the date, not a request: gate lists by 1 March 2027
September 2026RC-1 and RC-2 recorded
Before NovemberA producer named for 830 hours, and an editor named for 32
August 2026✓ Assessment window extended. Applied everywhere

End of production schedule.

Recording Plan

Nothing asked of you.

For: Whoever runs the chart class


She teaches it the way she teaches it. We record it well and see what she does.

She has been teaching this material for over fifty years and she will cover things nobody thought to ask for. Nothing on this page is asked of her, and nothing is scheduled around her.

Before it starts

Clean audio. Check it, separately from video, before she begins.

Clean video. Confirm the recording is running.

Transcript. Full, automated, saved with the recording.

One person noting what she does that she does not narrate, with a clock time against each. A plain text file is enough.

Recording consent from participants, and reuse consent if it is obtainable.

During

Nothing, beyond the notes. The person taking them does not participate and does not interrupt.

The one thing worth writing down is anything she does without explaining, particularly a moment where she stops referring to the chart. She is unlikely to flag it.

Same day

Raw file into the Source of Truth folder, named and dated. Not left on the platform.

Transcript and the note file saved alongside, same folder, same name.

Afterwards · review checklist

Whoever watches the footage checks whether each of these appeared, and where. This is a review list, not a shot list.

Did it appear, and at what time
1A reading run start to finish, including the parts she would not normally narrate
2A moment where she closes the chart and works with the person instead
3Something clinical coming up, and what she did with it
4A moment where she does not consult the chart at all, because she already Knows
5Anything else she did that is not written down anywhere. Expect several

If something is missing, we look for it in the next natural opportunity rather than engineering one. She teaches weekly and she reads constantly, so there is no shortage of occasions.

Who Does What

Every person, hours, cost, filled or open.

For: The team


Every named person, what they do, and what it costs

Version 1 · 6 August 2026 · Depends on: Production_Schedule


The people

PersonWhat they doHoursCostFilled?
Dr. EleanorTeaches all three weekends. Seven group calls. Six mentor sessions per student. Three niche sessions. Grades Gate 6. On camera for the recorded lessons~273 across eight months, plus 46 on camera—Yes
Marvin Portner, MDFaculty for the health and sleep material. Decides all appealsSmall, not yet counted—Yes, load not agreed
RazMakes every chart. Writes short notes on applicant charts for Dr. Eleanor. Marks the three written reports at Gate 5~112~$6,240 at $15 a chart, $40 a note, $60 a reportYes, rates not agreed
Cindy SmithAll design. The handbook, every handout, the workbooks, the three intensive manuals, the certificate~200~$15,000 at $75/hr, proposedYes, rate and load not agreed
CharlesThe chart software. And the four gate lists, due 1 March 2027UnknownUnknownYes, but nothing is documented
BrendanEverything else. Program build, forms, logs, sales page, application, the classroomMost of the 830—Yes
The lawyerThe participant agreement and the client agreement template—Their feeYes, work not started
Financing partnerLends to students who cannot pay in full—Their feeBeing arranged
An editorProofreads two of her documents before students see them32Not costedNO. Nobody named
A producerMakes the material. 12 recorded lessons, 6 workbooks, 24 lesson plans, all the forms~830Not costedNO. Nobody named

⚠ THE GAP

There are 830 hours of material to make before July 2027.

That is sixteen to eighteen hours every week for forty-eight weeks.

Nobody is assigned to it.

Right now every line of the build plan says Brendan or Cindy, and 200 of those hours are already Cindy's design work.

This is a hiring decision, not a scheduling one. It needs answering before enrollment opens on 2 November, not discovering in March.

The second gap, smaller

32 hours of proofreading, and nobody named.

Two of Dr. Eleanor's own documents have typos in text students will read. They cannot go out as they are, and they cannot be corrected by us without her approving every change, because in this material a typo and a term look alike from outside.


What Dr. Eleanor actually carries

People will ask whether this is too much for her. Here is the honest answer.

Hours
Three teaching weekends72
Seven group calls14
Mentor sessions, 12 students × 618
Three niche sessions5
Grading Gate 6 · provisional, see below57 to 72
Manifest Your Dreams, weekly, ongoing62
Recorded lessons, on camera46
Total~274 to 289

Her working day is 11:00 to 4:30.

Across the eight months that is about a third of her working time.

⚠ Two things about that table

The 57-hour Gate 6 figure is provisional and the likely direction is upward.

It assumes she reviews three recorded readings per candidate at one hour each. Tier Two readings are specified at ninety minutes. At ninety minutes the figure is closer to 72 hours, and twelve candidates at six hours each is 72 rather than 57.

It is her second-largest single item after the three weekends, and it lands in the six weeks at the end of the program. At 72 hours across the weeks 29 to 34 window it is twelve hours a week, which fits. At 57 it looked like nine.

What resolves it is not Raz's report timing. Report time drives Gate 5, which Raz marks. Gate 6 is driven by how long a recorded reading actually runs, and the only way to know is to time a real portfolio review once the first ones exist. Until then, plan on 72.

And 62 of those hours are not this program.

Manifest Your Dreams runs weekly whether or not a cohort is in session. It is in the table because the question is her total capacity, not because the certification costs her 62 hours of it.

Certification load is roughly 212 to 227 hours. Existing load is 62. Nobody should read 274 as what this program asks of her.

Two things make it fit. The weekends are only three. And the students spend far more hours on each other than she spends on them.

Nothing here needs to be filled in. These are the questions Brendan will walk through with you. Read them, mark them up however you prefer, on screen or on paper, and we will go through them together.

Part B · Seven choices

Seven places where two answers were both reasonable and we picked one. You may prefer the other. This is where your time should go.

Start with B1. It is the only one that changes what is taught in more than one intensive. If you disagree with it, tell us before reading further.

B1

We chose

The Spiritual/Archetypal World comes first in the content, and a practitioner's own development runs instrument first. Module 1 follows your World order. Modules 2 to 4 build the instrument, then the reading

The other option

The Spiritual/Archetypal World comes first in a practitioner's development too, so soul-level and therapeutic depth work leads rather than follows

What changes if you prefer it

The order of the three intensives does not change either way. A candidate cannot read a Map before they can read a chart. What changes is where the depth sits. At present it lands in Intensive III. If you prefer the other answer, it moves forward and threads through all three intensives, which changes what is taught in Intensive I and II and changes the manuals for both

To discuss with Brendan · does the Spiritual/Archetypal World come first in a practitioner's own development, or after they can hold the instrument?
B2

We chose

A practicum report is the Map chapters only, three hours. The full nine sections appear only in the portfolio

The other option

Every practicum report is the full nine sections

What changes if you prefer it

Program hours go from 296 to 326, and weeks 19 to 27 run at 13.8 hours a week. We judged that unsustainable. You may judge it necessary

To discuss with Brendan · should a practicum report be the Map chapters only, or all nine sections every time?
B3

We chose

Peer readings work from the twelve cohort charts. Each candidate's own Map is read by up to eleven peers

The other option

Every candidate supplies their own subjects for peer work

What changes if you prefer it

Chart requirement rises from about 192 to about 330. The cohort-peer consent and its opt-out become unnecessary. The loss is that a reader can no longer check a reading against a person who is present

To discuss with Brendan · should peer readings work from the cohort's own twelve charts, or should each candidate find their own subjects?
B4

We chose

Gate 5 is marked by the report marker and countersigned by you

The other option

You mark all three reports yourself

What changes if you prefer it

Adds 33 hours to her assessment load in a five-week window, and removes the only genuinely independent appeal chain in the program

To discuss with Brendan · should Gate 5 be marked by the report marker and countersigned by you, or marked by you?
B5

We chose

Milestones are asynchronous submissions

The other option

Milestones are live check-ins

What changes if you prefer it

Adds seven hours of faculty time, doubles the live touchpoints against seven group calls already carrying them. The gain would be that question 6 gets answered out loud

To discuss with Brendan · should the seven milestones be written submissions, or live check-ins?
B6

We chose

Intensive II opens with factor structure, then the matrices

The other option

Opens with the matrices, then factor structure, which was the Pass 2 order

What changes if you prefer it

Minor. We changed it because a candidate cannot filter Gates by World before knowing what defines a World

To discuss with Brendan · should Intensive II open with the factor structure, or with the matrices?
B7

We chose

Relationship reports stay out of the core credential and appear only as elective E2

The other option

Relationship reading is core, taught in Intensive III

What changes if you prefer it

Requires two charts per practicum subject and a synastry layer nobody has been taught. It is a second product and we judged it belongs after the first one works

To discuss with Brendan · should relationship reading be part of the core credential, or stay an elective?

Reading for children

This is not one of the choices above. It is a decision already made, and it is here so you know it was made and why.

The decision

A graduate of this certification does not read for anyone under eighteen.

Clients must be eighteen or older. That sentence is fixed text in the client agreement a graduate uses, it is on the Checklist, and it is on the sales page.

Reading for children moves into the Parents and Children specialization, which is separate training against a separate standard, taken after certification.

Why

The Soul Knows is your most parent-facing work, so unpaid practice subjects will include children the moment a template allows it.

An unlicensed graduate reading a child's chart, and telling a parent what they see about that child's inner life, is the act in this credential that sits closest to the clinical line.

The person being read cannot consent. The person receiving the reading is making decisions about somebody else's development.

And this is the one place where the gap between you and your graduates is widest. You are a licensed clinical psychologist with fifty years of parent-facing work. They will not be. Nothing about this decision limits what you do.

What changing it would require

It is not a preference we can switch.

It needs counsel, because a minor cannot consent and a guardian consent process has to be drafted and reviewed.

We have not designed one, and we have not asked counsel to.

It also needs a decision on whether the Program carries any duty when a graduate reads a child, which is a different insurance question from the one already open.

So if you want this changed, tell us and we will start that work. It is not a line to strike through.


To discuss with Brendan · confirm that graduates do not read for anyone under eighteen, or tell us to start the counsel work on a guardian consent process?

Part A · Twenty-two confirmations

Nothing here changes the shape of the program. Read and confirm, or correct.

A1

Six-hour intensive day, four blocks, sixteen taught hours

Her 11:00 to 5:00, and four days at a slower pace as stated intent

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A2

Intensive I opens on the candidate's own chart. Field reports from Intensive II

Logs open week 8 and Intensive I is week 7, so there is nothing to report

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A3

Two tiers of reading, Tier One from week 8

Practice starts on partial competence, and a candidate cannot practice what Intensive II has not taught

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A4

Practicum readings one to five are Tier One, from week 13

Useful to a subject, needs no matrices, and it levels the load

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A5

PIG opens week 12, practicum week 13, peer groups week 14

Three openings in one week produced a 9.2-hour spike

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A6

The three facilitated PIG meetings run to all groups together

Three sessions rather than nine, and the reference model already shares facilitated content across niches

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A7

Group calls in weeks 6, 10, 14, 17, 20, 24, 27

Removes a five-week gap across Intensive II, and call five now falls immediately after it

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A8

Group call 1 in the gap week, carrying introductions and the log walkthrough

The only moment before Intensive I with the whole cohort present

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A9

Portfolio window opens week 27

Practicum closes there, so nothing requires the delay

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A10

Milestones at weeks 10, 13, 15, 17, 21, 24, 27

Adapted from the reference set's post-module rhythm to a ten and nine week cycle

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A11

I-2 before I-3

Two different books, so chapter order cannot compare them. A candidate should see a chart before being told how its windows are calculated

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A12

The displacement principle stated as a general rule

Both instances are hers. The generalisation is ours

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A13

Channel 5-15 as the Intensive II teaching spine

It is the only Channel carrying all fifteen World configurations, and structurally so

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A14

Peer group restraint sessions at 9 and 10

A candidate cannot practice declining to interpret before they can interpret

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A15

Mentor session 4 is a reading that did not go well, written up as a half page

No source. It is the strongest available predictor of Gate 6

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A16

The eight rehearsals of the omission question, fourteen instances

The credential rests on a judgment, and a judgment is built by making it repeatedly

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A17

The color coding rules are taught as fact and the World hex values as provisional

The four rules are hers. Three palettes exist for the values and none is authoritative

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A18

Transit imprints taught as a rule with the interpretation marked as under development

One sentence of source. CAPTURE

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A19

Her dwad treatment taught against Escobar, credited

Her own treatment beyond p.124 is not located

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A20

Gate 5's four threshold conditions

Two markers need a stated pass line or the countersignature becomes a rubber stamp

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A21

The five omission-rationale failure conditions, especially withholding clinical material

It is the criterion most open to a generous marker

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct
A22

Elective effort range of six to thirty hours, stated rather than equalised

Forcing parity would inflate the light options or gut the heavy ones

To discuss with Brendan · confirm or correct

One line in your Principles page

Line 10 reads: Facilitate change without undermining a person's self-esteem or core being.

Every other line on that page is your own wording. This one is not. In Living From Soul you are describing your own motivation. Turning it into an instruction to a student changes your voice, so it goes to you as a question rather than a draft.

To discuss with Brendan · is line 10 your wording, or would you rather it came out?

Faculty manual, session specs, the record, the tools.

Faculty Operations Manual

How the program is run and marked.

For: Faculty


What is below

INTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT · Week 7 · 18 to 21 February 2027

I-1 · Body Map, Not Body Graph

I-2 · Your Own Chart, Page by Page

I-3 · The 88-Unit Rule

I-4 · The Five Types

I-5 · The Nine Centers

I-6 · What Is Not Interpreted

I-7 · Patterns of Orientation

I-8 · The Astrology You Need

INTENSIVE II · THE MAP · Week 18 · 6 to 9 May 2027

II-1 · Factor Structure and the Four Worlds

II-2 · The World Matrices

II-3 · Channel Formation and Transit Imprints

II-4 · Portals

II-5 · The 148 Channels and Channel Master

II-6 · Channel Priority

II-7 · Frequency Is Not Priority

II-8 · The Integration Composites

INTENSIVE III · THE READING · Week 28 · 15 to 18 July 2027

III-1 · The Specification as a Standard

III-2 · The Method Rules

III-3 · Synthesize, Never Quote

III-4 · The Astrology Chapters

III-5 · Keys and Action Points

III-6 · Delivering the Reading

III-7 · What You Do Not Say

52 sections, about 8,894 words. This is a long document.

Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps · Cohort One

Internal. Not issued to candidates. Not in her register.


CONTENTS

1. The twenty-four intensive session specifications

2. The twelve recorded core modules

3. The seven group call agendas

4. Gate 5 and Gate 6 marking, with thresholds

5. The milestone review standard, and the escalation procedure

6. The report marker role, scope and rates

7. Appeal chains

8. What is blocked, and what it blocks


1. # SECTION 3 — THE TWENTY-FOUR INTENSIVE SESSIONS

Two sessions a day, four days, two hours each. Sixteen taught hours per intensive.

Day shape. 11:00 opening block, 30 min. 11:30 Session A, 120 min. 1:30 break, 45 min. 2:15 Session B, 120 min. 4:15 integration and what happens next, 45 min. 5:00 close.

The opening block differs by intensive. Intensive I opens on the candidate's own chart, because logs do not open until week 8 and there is no practice to report. Intensives II and III open on field reports.


INTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT · Week 7 · 18 to 21 February 2027

Target: Gates 1 and 2 passable at the close.

I-1 · Body Map, Not Body Graph

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. State the Four Worlds and what each governs. Explain why one World is not enough. Locate the five components of the Mandala of Synthesis®. Derive four from two from one.

Source. Beyond Human Design pp.1 to 3 and p.84. Living From Soul Ch.2 to 6. Astrology Essentials Part I, Sacred Synthesis Components, and Part III with Illustration 4. SOURCED: Astrology Essentials opens with the Mandala, so the frame precedes the mechanics.

Teacher does. Opens with the thesis in her own words: Human Design maps one World and you live in four. Names the two itemised omissions from Beyond Human Design p.2. Draws the Mandala of Synthesis® and names all five components. Walks Yang and Yin, one becomes two becomes four, so the Four Worlds arrive derived rather than asserted.

Students do. Label a blank Mandala with all five components. Write, in one sentence each, what each World governs.

Exercise. Pairs. Each names a client who did everything right and did not change, and says which World the work was done in.

Materials. Mandala handout, blank and labeled. Illustration 4. Four Worlds reference card.

At the end they can. Explain the system's architecture and its derivation to a skeptical colleague without a chart in front of them.

I-2 · Your Own Chart, Page by Page

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. Separate Design from Personality activations. Read gate and line notation. Identify the thirteen planetary glyphs including Chiron.

Source. Human Design & Health, Personality and Design Calculations figure, which sits in the introductory material ahead of the Types chapter. SOURCED. Astrology Essentials Illustration 10. Cosmic Secrets pp.17 to 18 for Chiron.

Teacher does. Puts her own chart on screen and reads the page furniture before any interpretation. Names every glyph. Explains why Chiron is there and is not in Human Design.

Students do. Work on their own chart, generated from the birth data they gave at application. Mark Design and Personality columns. Circle every glyph they cannot name.

Exercise. Individual, then table review. Every candidate holds their own Map on day one, which is the strongest available start and costs nothing.

Materials. Each candidate's own chart, printed and on screen. Glyph reference sheet.

At the end they can. Point at any activation on their own chart and say what it is, without interpreting it.

I-3 · The 88-Unit Rule

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Name the four units. Name the eight layers, their windows and their Worlds. Derive the windows from the rule. State the halving relationship. Distinguish eight layers from ten printed charts.

Source. Science of Human Design p.5, which gives the rule ahead of the Type distribution at p.14. SOURCED. Template Specification §5 and §7. The printed chart, page 2, for the Integrated Vehicles.

Teacher does. Gives the rule: 88 solar degrees, 88 solar minutes, 88 lunar degrees, 88 lunar minutes, before and after birth, where minute means arcminute. Derives three of the four windows at the board from two rates of motion.

⚠ One exception is taught as an exception. 88 lunar arcminutes computes to roughly 160 minutes and the printed layer reads 90. Taught as an open question, not smoothed over.

Students do. Derive the eight windows from the rule and the two rates. Label all ten printed charts on their own Map.

Exercise. Tables race to derive the windows. First correct set explains it back.

Materials. Calculators. Layer naming sheet. Both sample charts.

At the end they can. Derive the eight windows from first principles and name all eight layers with their Worlds.

I-4 · The Five Types

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Name the five Types and their mechanical definitions. State the distribution. Explain how Type differs by layer. State the over-99% finding and what it measures.

Source. Human Design & Health, The Types chapter, which follows the introduction. SOURCED, chapter order. Science of Human Design Table 1.1 p.14 and pp.5, 84. Cosmic Secrets p.16 for the worked layer example.

Teacher does. Defines each Type mechanically. Gives the distribution. Works Cosmic Secrets p.16, a Manifestor in one layer and a Generator in another, on a real chart. Then the over-99% finding: roughly 34% are Manifesting Generators in the Mental/Waking World alone, over 99% in the Integrated Body Map. Stated as what it measures and nothing beyond.

Students do. Determine Type in each of their own eight layers.

Exercise. Tables compare. Whoever has the most Type variation across layers presents it.

Materials. Type definition card. Distribution table.

At the end they can. Determine Type per layer and explain why a one-World Type reading is incomplete.

I-5 · The Nine Centers

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Name and locate all nine. Read definition. Name the four Definition types. State that Center definition does not predict medical conditions. State that only the Mental/Waking and Physical/Biological Worlds carry the Solar Plexus.

Source. Human Design & Health, the Nine Centers chapter with a figure per Center. SOURCED, chapter order. Beyond Human Design p.2 for the medical finding, p.88 for the Solar Plexus, p.89 for intuition requiring Emotional/Angelic integration.

Teacher does. One Center at a time, using her own figures. Then the negative finding, stated plainly: medical conditions occur independently of Center definition, and language that treats an undefined Center as a vulnerability is disempowering.

Students do. Mark defined and undefined Centers in each of their own layers. Identify their Definition type.

Exercise. Scripted client questions. One candidate asks "does my undefined Throat mean I have thyroid problems," the other answers. Rotates through four scripts.

Materials. Nine Center figures. Definition type sheet. Scripted question cards.

At the end they can. Read Center definition across layers and decline a medical inference without losing the client.

I-6 · What Is Not Interpreted

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Explain why Profile carries no inferable interpretation. Explain why Lines are a mathematical artifact. Name what replaces each. Decline to interpret either.

Source. Science of Human Design p.4. Beyond Human Design p.1. Human Design & Health p.124 for Lines and the substitution of the sign with its dwad. Human Design & Health places Profiles and Lines last. SOURCED, chapter order.

Teacher does. Shows that Profile occurs at exactly the regularity the hexagram structure predicts, and that frequency does not vary across populations, so nothing can be inferred. Then the general principle: what is mathematically determined carries no information. Then p.124: the sign with its dwad yields more specific information than Lines do. Names Thyrza Escobar and Pamela Crane for the dwad technique.

⚠ The displacement principle is ASSUMED as a general rule. Both instances are hers. The generalisation is ours and is marked.

Students do. Write the two displacements and their replacements in their own words.

Exercise. Pairs. One plays a Human Design practitioner arguing for Profile. The other holds the finding without dismissing the person.

Materials. Displacement one-pager. Escobar citation.

At the end they can. Explain both displacements and decline both interpretations, with the reasoning and the attribution.

I-7 · Patterns of Orientation

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Locate the Sun's Gate. Read all six fields of a Patterns of Orientation entry. Name the sixteen Foundation Patterns, four variants each, and the six Pattern qualities. Read a Foundation Pattern as printed on a chart.

Source. Patterns of Orientation workbook, sixty-four rows, and its own header: statements for the Sun position and keynote instead of Profile. Template Specification §5 for the six qualities. Both sample charts for printed Patterns. SOURCED by substitution: it arrives immediately after I-6 removed what it replaces.

Teacher does. Reads her own entry aloud, all six fields. Then walks the sixteen Patterns and the four-variant structure resolving to sixty-four. Then reads Foundation Patterns off both sample charts.

⚠ Two open items are named to the room rather than hidden. The printed charts label everything a Foundation Pattern while the workbook distinguishes Foundation, Transitional and Changing. And the sixteen Pattern names are being checked for provenance.

Students do. Read their own entry, all six fields. Read the Foundation Patterns printed on their own chart.

Exercise. Trios. Each reads their own orientation statement aloud. The other two say whether it lands. The person is present, so the reading can be checked against what they already know, which is the whole argument for cohort charts.

Materials. Patterns of Orientation workbook, proofed. Pattern quality card. Own charts.

At the end they can. Read a person's orientation from the Sun's Hexagram, across all six fields.

I-8 · The Astrology You Need

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Read a tropical Placidus natal wheel. Name house rulerships and sign keynotes. Apply the four color coding rules. State why birth time precision matters.

Source. Astrology Essentials Parts II, IV and V, with the color key closing the book. SOURCED, chapter order: the mechanics follow the frame and the color key is last.

Teacher does. Wheel, houses, rulerships, keynotes. Then Part V: two minutes changes the Moon, and the 90-minute Physical layer makes minute-level precision consequential. Then the four color rules.

⚠ Color is taught as ASSUMED. Three palettes exist and none is authoritative. The four coding rules are hers and are taught as fact. The specific World hex values are flagged as provisional.

Students do. Read their own natal wheel. Color a supplied chart against the four rules.

Exercise. Two candidates with birth times two minutes apart compare charts. If nobody qualifies, a constructed pair is supplied.

Materials. Natal wheels for all twelve. Color key. Blank chart for coloring.

At the end they can. Read a natal wheel, apply the color rules, and explain to a client why birth time matters.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Gates 1 and 2 assessed. Peer dyad partners assigned. Tier One protocol issued.


INTENSIVE II · THE MAP · Week 18 · 6 to 9 May 2027

⚠ The four World gate matrices are a named variable throughout: [M-SPIRITUAL] 15 Gates, [M-PHYSICAL] 25 Gates, [M-EMOTIONAL] 33 Gates, [M-MENTAL] all 64.

Every session below is fully specified. The lists drop into the exercises and the answer keys without restructuring anything. Where a list is required, the session says which.

⚠ The order revises Pass 2 and the reason is logical rather than pedagogical. Pass 2 opened with the matrices and closed with factor structure. A candidate cannot filter Gates by World until they know what defines a World, so factor structure comes first. ASSUMED, with that reasoning.

II-1 · Factor Structure and the Four Worlds

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. Name the four factors and their Centers. State the Ajna and Crown dual membership. State the factor to World mapping. Explain the Sacral dual loading and the bridge it creates.

Source. Science of Human Design Tables 6.1 to 6.2 pp.75 to 79 and p.77 for the Sacral. Her April 5 slide, THE FOUR WORLD MATRICES. Her ruling of 5 August: Ajna and Crown are their own factor and also operate with the Sacral, the G/Self and the Throat.

Teacher does. Presents the four factors with loadings. Explains dual membership for Ajna, Crown and the Sacral. Gives the factor to World mapping and the gate counts, 15, 25, 33, 64. Explains the Sacral connecting the Spiritual/Archetypal and Emotional/Angelic Worlds.

Students do. Build the four factors from a supplied loading table. Map each to its World.

Exercise. Tables assemble the four Worlds from the nine Centers, unaided, then check against her table.

Materials. Loading table. Four World Matrices slide. Factor card.

At the end they can. State what defines each World in terms of Centers, factors and gate count.

Variable needed. None. This session teaches why the counts are what they are.

II-2 · The World Matrices

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. State the matrix rule. Determine, for a given layer, which activated Gates can form a Channel in that World and which cannot.

Source. Template Specification §7: each World reads only the Gates of its own matrix, Channels form only within a World whose matrix carries both Gates, and activated Gates outside a World's matrix are read as transit imprints.

Teacher does. States the rule. Issues the four lists. Works one layer of a supplied chart, marking every activated Gate as in-matrix or out.

Students do. Filter three supplied layers against the lists. Then filter their own eight layers.

Exercise. Individual, timed, against an answer key.

Materials. ⚠ [M-SPIRITUAL], [M-PHYSICAL], [M-EMOTIONAL] as printed reference cards. Answer keys for three worked layers.

At the end they can. Filter any layer against its World's matrix.

Variable needed. All three lists, plus keys derived from them.

II-3 · Channel Formation and Transit Imprints

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Form Channels within a World. Identify activated Gates that cannot form a Channel. Read those as transit imprints.

Source. Template Specification §7. CAPTURE: transit imprints exist as one sentence, unconscious predisposing perceptions, and need her expansion.

Teacher does. Forms Channels on a worked layer. Then the disposal rule: what happens to every activated Gate that cannot complete. In most layers that is the majority of them.

⚠ This is the thinnest source in the whole program. One sentence. Until it is captured, the session teaches the rule and states plainly that the interpretive treatment is under development.

Students do. Form all Channels in their own eight layers. List every leftover Gate per layer.

Exercise. Pairs check each other's Channel formation and imprint lists.

Materials. Matrix cards. Channel formation worksheet, eight layers.

At the end they can. Form Channels correctly and account for every activated Gate that does not.

Variable needed. All three lists.

II-4 · Portals

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Define a Portal. Identify Portals on a chart. Explain how Portals produce 148 Channels from 36.

Source. Beyond Human Design p.3 and the 34-57 worked example. ⚠ Glossary item: Portal means something different in the Triple Design Matrix, 2000. The 2024 meaning is current and both are taught so nobody is confused later.

Teacher does. Works 34-57 in full. Then shows how a Gate whose partner sits outside its World's matrix behaves.

Students do. Identify every Portal across their own eight layers.

Exercise. Tables build the arithmetic from 36 to 148 and check it against the book.

Materials. 34-57 worked example. Matrix cards. Portal worksheet.

At the end they can. Identify Portals and explain the 148.

Variable needed. All three lists.

II-5 · The 148 Channels and Channel Master

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Navigate the 148 entries. Use Channel Master's conditional structure. Match an interpretation to the World a Channel is active in. Proceed from the primary source when Channel Master has no block.

Source. Beyond Human Design, 148 entries, primary. Channel Master, 278 conditional blocks, secondary cross-reference. Template Specification §7: synthesize, never quote either.

Teacher does. Reads one Channel across three different World configurations from Channel Master. Then Channel 5-15, the only Channel carrying all fifteen configurations, because Gates 5 and 15 are the only pair present in all four matrices. Then 19-49, which has seven for the same reason.

⚠ Coverage is uneven and taught as such. Most Channels have three to six blocks. A candidate who draws an uncovered configuration works from Beyond Human Design, and that is a competency rather than a failure.

Students do. Read three of their own Channels, matching each to its World. One deliberately chosen where no block exists.

Exercise. Tables take the same Channel in four Worlds and compare their four readings.

Materials. Beyond Human Design. Channel Master. Coverage map showing which configurations have blocks.

At the end they can. Interpret a Channel in the language of the World it is active in, and handle a gap.

Variable needed. All three lists, for the World matching.

II-6 · Channel Priority

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Order a layer's Channels by Channel Priority. Name Channels completing only across layers or only in integration.

Source. Channel Priorities, forty-one entries, columns D and E. Template Specification §7: always name Channels that complete only across layers or only in integration, because these are frequently the person's highest priority energies.

Teacher does. Issues the sheet and explains how to read it. Orders a full chart live.

Students do. Order their own Channels across all eight layers.

Exercise. Individual, against a key.

Materials. Channel Priorities sheet, printed. Ordering worksheet.

At the end they can. Produce a correctly ordered priority list for any chart.

Variable needed. None.

II-7 · Frequency Is Not Priority

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Judge priority independently of frequency. Work her Channel 30-41 case.

Source. Her worked example: in the eclipse chart, Channel 30-41 appears in all eight layers and is the lowest priority Channel across all priorities, ranking forty-one of forty-one.

Teacher does. Presents 30-41 in all eight layers, invites the room to call it the dominant theme, then gives the ranking. This is the single most likely place a self-taught reader goes wrong and the session is built around that.

Students do. Four constructed cases where frequency and priority diverge.

Exercise. Pairs. One argues from frequency, the other from priority. Then swap.

Materials. The eclipse chart. Four constructed cases with keys. Priorities sheet.

At the end they can. Explain to a client why the thing appearing everywhere is not the thing to work on.

Variable needed. None.

II-8 · The Integration Composites

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Name the five composite Integration Channels. Explain why they rank above all thirty-six standard Channels. Identify them on a chart.

Source. Channel Priorities, where 10-57-34-20, 10-34-20, 20-57-34, 20-34, 10-57-34 and 10-34 occupy the top six ranks. Science of Human Design p.77 for the Sacral dual loading.

⚠ CAPTURE. The ranking exists and the rationale does not. Until captured, the session teaches the ranking as fact and the reasoning as her documented reading of the Sacral dual loading, marked as our reconstruction.

Teacher does. Shows the top of the priority sheet. Connects the composites to the Sacral bridging the Spiritual/Archetypal and Emotional/Angelic Worlds.

Students do. Identify any composites in their own chart. Those without any pair with those who have.

Exercise. Trios. Read one composite for its holder, present, and check it against what they know about themselves.

Materials. Priorities sheet. Composite reference card.

At the end they can. Identify and read the Integration composites, and say why they come first.

Variable needed. None.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Gate 3 assessed. Tier Two protocol issued. Practicum readings 6 to 15 open.


INTENSIVE III · THE READING · Week 28 · 15 to 18 July 2027

Target: Gates 5 and 6.

III-1 · The Specification as a Standard

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. Name all nine report sections in order. Apply the format, typography and language rules. Name the fixed text blocks.

Source. Template Specification §1 to §6 and §8. SOURCED: §2 is the order.

Teacher does. Walks all nine sections against a completed report. Gives the language rules: capitalisation, bolding, trademark placement, hyphenation. Names the Teaching Notes.

⚠ One fixed block is void and taught as void. The science paragraph has been withdrawn. Candidates are told it was withdrawn and why, because a graduate holding an old Specification would keep publishing it.

Students do. Audit a supplied report against the nine sections and the rules. Twelve deliberate errors are planted.

Exercise. Individual audit, then table comparison of what each found.

Materials. Template Specification, current version. Completed model report. Audit report with planted errors and a key.

At the end they can. Say whether a report meets the standard, and where it does not.

III-2 · The Method Rules

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. Execute §7 end to end. Compute each layer's Channels, pair prenatal with postnatal correctly, filter against the matrix, order by priority, name integration-only Channels, confirm Sun and Moon correspondences.

Source. Template Specification §7. SOURCED.

Teacher does. Works a chart from raw activations to an ordered, World-matched Channel list, narrating every rule as she applies it.

Students do. The same, on a supplied chart, against a key.

Exercise. Timed, individual. This is Gate 5's technical content and the drill is the assessment in rehearsal.

Materials. Supplied chart. §7 checklist, which is also Raz's marking checklist. Answer key.

At the end they can. Execute the method rules on any chart and check their own work against the checklist a marker will use.

III-3 · Synthesize, Never Quote

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Produce a Channel description from the primary source with no verbatim overlap.

Source. Template Specification §7: synthesize from Beyond Human Design using Channel Master as secondary, and never quote either. SOURCED: §7 places this before the astrology sections.

Teacher does. Takes one Channel entry and rewrites it three ways at three registers, showing what survives and what must change.

Students do. Synthesize four Channel descriptions. Submitted and scored for verbatim overlap.

Exercise. Pairs swap and mark each other's for overlap against the source.

Materials. Beyond Human Design. Channel Master. Overlap scoring sheet, which is a BUILD item.

At the end they can. Write a Channel description that is theirs and is faithful.

III-4 · The Astrology Chapters

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Produce the natal structure, house rulership, dwad and current sky sections. Identify eclipses in the prenatal and postnatal Solar windows and keep degrees approximate unless certain.

Source. Template Specification §2 and §7. Astrology Essentials Parts II, IV, V. Human Design & Health p.124 for the dwad. Escobar and Crane credited.

⚠ BUILD. The dwad technique has a published external derivation and her own treatment beyond p.124 is not located. Taught against Escobar, credited, and marked as ASSUMED until she supplies her own.

Teacher does. Produces each astrology section live. Derives a dwad. Locates the eclipse thread.

Students do. Produce all four astrology sections for one chart.

Exercise. Individual, then compared against her worked version.

Materials. Ephemeris access. Dwad reference. Eclipse tables for the cohort's birth years.

At the end they can. Produce every astrology section the Specification requires.

III-5 · Keys and Action Points

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Select from the full ranked set what a person can act on. Produce about six Keys to Empowerment and about six Action Points.

Source. Template Specification §2, which closes with them. Beyond Human Design, where every one of the 148 entries carries both. SOURCED by position.

Teacher does. Takes a forty-item priority list and reduces it to six, saying out loud what she is discarding and why.

Students do. Reduce a supplied forty-item list to six Keys and six Action Points, with a written reason for each discard.

Exercise. Tables compare their six. Divergence is the lesson.

Materials. Supplied priority list. Keys and Action Points format sheet.

At the end they can. Produce Keys and Action Points a person can act on this week.

III-6 · Delivering the Reading

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Identify which World a person is speaking from and answer in it. Run the chart, close it, and enter the session on the person. Deliver Stop, Observe, Align. Acknowledge rather than claim to understand.

Source. Beyond Human Design p.3. Four Worlds Mastery Weeks 1 to 4. The Soul Knows slide 7 for Stop, Observe, Align. Brugh Joy credited for acknowledgment. David Grove credited for Clean Language.

⚠ CAPTURE, and it is the whole of the credential. Three transcript instances have her running the chart, closing it, and going to the person, and none explains it. This session is built around recorded footage of her doing it. Until that exists, the session is a live demonstration by her and cannot be delivered by anyone else.

Teacher does. Delivers a full reading to a volunteer, in front of the room, with the chart closed for the first ten minutes.

Students do. Watch, then debrief what she did in those ten minutes.

Exercise. Trios. Reader, receiver, observer. Chart closed for the first ten minutes. Observer logs every point where the reader reached for the chart.

Materials. Recorded reading, CAPTURE. Observer log sheet. Clean Questions card, Grove credited.

At the end they can. Open a reading on the person rather than on the chart.

III-7 · What You Do Not Say

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Recognize clinical material. Stop the reading. Refer, and say why. Decline to diagnose without losing the client. Decline to consult the chart when direct Knowing is available.

Source. The Referral Protocol, in full. CAPTURE for her handling of the moment. Three transcript instances for the refusal.

⚠ The Referral Protocol is drafted against external professional standards and not from her corpus, because her threshold is a licensed psychologist's threshold and a graduate's must be more conservative. Taught as standard of care, attributed as such.

Teacher does. Works the three referral categories. Then the refusal: a moment where she declines to look at the chart because she already Knows, and what told her.

Students do. Eight scripted scenarios, four requiring referral and four requiring only a stated boundary.

Exercise. Pairs, scripted. Then each writes their own referral list and has it checked.

Materials. Referral Protocol. Eight scenario cards. Referral list template. Recorded refusal, CAPTURE.

At the end they can. Recognize the line, stop, refer, and explain the boundary without losing the person.

III-8 · The Omission Rationale

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Write a rationale for what was left out of a reading and why. Defend it.

Source. No source. This is the assessment instrument. BUILD. SOURCED by position: it is the last thing taught, and it is the credential.

Teacher does. Takes the reading she delivered in III-6 and writes the omission rationale for it in front of the room. Names everything she saw and did not say, and the rule she was following each time.

Students do. Write the omission rationale for the reading they gave in III-6's exercise.

Exercise. Pairs. Each reads their rationale aloud. The partner asks, once, why that thing was left out. The answer is the assessment in miniature.

Materials. Omission rationale form and rubric, both BUILD. Their III-6 observer logs.

At the end they can. Account for their own restraint in writing, which is what Gate 6 assesses.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Portfolio requirements issued. Defense scheduling. Gate 4 pack due week 29.



2. # SECTION 4 — THE TWELVE RECORDED CORE MODULES

Thirty hours, self-paced, in the Skool classroom. Everything tagged EXISTS that does not need a live room.

Nothing from Intensive II is here, because it is blocked. Nothing from Gate 6 is here, because a recording of her explaining a reading is not a recording of a reading.

#ModuleHrsContentsSourceWatch by
RC-1The Four Worlds and the Body Map3The four Worlds and what each governs. Body Graph is not Body Map. The two omissions from Human Design. The Integrated WorldLiving From Soul Ch.2 to 6. BHD pp.1 to 3, 84. Mastery Wks 1 to 5Week 1
RC-2Chart anatomy3Design and Personality. Gate and line notation. The thirteen glyphs. Chiron and why it is thereHD&H, Personality and Design Calculations. Astrology Essentials Illus. 10. Cosmic Secrets pp.17 to 18Week 2
RC-3The 88-unit rule and the eight layers2The four units. The eight layers, names and windows. The halving. Eight layers against ten printed chartsSoHD p.5. Spec §5 and §7. Chart page 2Week 8
RC-4The Five Types2Mechanical definitions. The distribution. Type by layer. The over-99% finding and what it measuresHD&H. SoHD Table 1.1 p.14, and pp.5, 84. Cosmic Secrets p.16Week 8
RC-5The Nine Centers4One Center at a time, her figure for each. Definition and the four Definition types. Center definition does not predict medical conditions. Only Mental/Waking and Physical/Biological carry the Solar PlexusHD&H, Nine Centers chapter. BHD pp.2, 88, 89Week 11
RC-6The Mandala of Synthesis®2All five components. Yang and Yin, one becomes two becomes four. The 384 correspondence, with her own caveat attachedAstrology Essentials Parts I and III, Illus. 4 and 5. BHD p.3Week 14
RC-7The wheel, houses and keynotes4Tropical Placidus. The twelve houses. Rulerships. Sign keynotes. Significant years by planetary cycleAstrology Essentials Parts II and IV, Illus. 7, 8, 10Week 16
RC-8Precision, and the color system2Why two minutes changes the Moon. The 90-minute layer. The four color coding rulesAstrology Essentials Part V and the color keyWeek 17
RC-9Patterns of Orientation3The sixty-four entries, all six fields. The sixteen Foundation Patterns, four variants, six qualities. Trigram imagesThe Patterns of Orientation workbook, proofedWeek 19
RC-10The displacements1Profile as a mathematical artifact. Lines as a mathematical artifact. The sign with its dwad. Escobar and Crane creditedSoHD p.4. BHD p.1. HD&H p.124. Astrology Essentials bibliographyWeek 21
RC-11The Template Specification3All nine sections in order. Format, typography, language rules. Teaching Notes. The fixed blocks, and the one that was withdrawn and whyThe Specification, current versionWeek 23
RC-12Conduct1Anonymization. The logs. The referral protocol. Disclaimers. The license and what it does not permitHer TDM case precedent. 01a. The Referral Protocol. The Participant AgreementWeek 25
Total30

Watch-by dates place RC-1 and RC-2 inside Module 1, which is why the first six weeks carry 5 hours of recorded content and only 3.5 hours a week overall.

⚠ RC-5 and RC-7 are four hours each and both are straight book chapters. They are the two to produce first, and they are the two where a faculty member other than her can present the material because the figures do the teaching.

⚠ RC-11 must carry a version number on screen. A graduate holding an old Specification would keep publishing a withdrawn claim, and the license obliges them to operate on the version in force.



3. # SECTION 10 — THE SEVEN GROUP CALLS

Two hours, monthly. Weeks 6, 10, 14, 17, 20, 24, 27. An agenda each, not a template.

Standing shape. Field reports first, always. Then the business of the call. Then the next milestone named, and what to bring to the next call.

Call 1 · Week 6 · The whole cohort, first time

The only moment before Intensive I with everyone present, including those who joined at week 6 with the Mastery credit.

Introductions, fifteen minutes, one Map each. Everyone has their own chart from the application, so introductions happen through the charts rather than through biographies.

The Certification Checklist, walked line by line. What every log is, when it opens, and what it means that nothing opens until week 8.

The eight rehearsals, explained as pedagogy. Said here rather than discovered later.

Scope of practice and the referral protocol, read aloud, in full. Before any teaching happens.

What to bring to Intensive I: their own chart printed, and their birth time confirmed to the minute if they can get it.

Call 2 · Week 10 · First readings

Field reports from the first two peer readings.

One question round: what did the receiver say that you had not seen in the chart.

The mentor session one gate explained: two completed peer readings, and what she will be looking for.

Milestone 1 due this week. What it asks and why the last question is the one that matters.

Call 3 · Week 14 · The instrument in use

Field reports.

Two candidates present a full Tier One reading of their own Map, ten minutes each, group response.

Peer groups open this week. The twelve-session arc explained, and the standing shape: ten minutes each, person read gives feedback first.

Common errors from HW-1 to HW-4, named without naming candidates.

Call 4 · Week 17 · Before the Map

Field reports, including the five Tier One practicum readings.

What changed when the subject was not a peer. Everyone answers.

Intensive II briefed. What the matrices are, why the lists matter, and that everything before this has been reading a chart rather than reading a Map.

Milestone 4 due. Practicum Tier One closes.

Call 5 · Week 20 · The first full reading

Field reports from the first Tier Two readings.

The gap between an ordered priority list and something a person can act on. She works one live, from a candidate's own chart.

The practicum report format, and what formative comment on HW-9 will look like.

Call 6 · Week 24 · Portfolio briefing

Field reports.

The three portfolio readings: what makes three readings different enough from each other to demonstrate range. This is what mentor session 6 assesses and candidates hear it four weeks early.

The omission rationale, worked once by her on a reading she has just described.

Elective proposals due. Each candidate says theirs in one sentence.

Call 7 · Week 27 · Defense briefing

Portfolios are in. Nothing new is taught.

What the oral defense is: one reading, defended live, thirty to forty-five minutes.

What she will ask. Why that reading, what you left out, and what you would do differently. Said plainly, because a defense is not an ambush.

Scheduling. Renewal, the license, and what happens at graduation.



4. GATE 5 AND GATE 6 MARKING

GATE 5 · REPORT PORTFOLIO

Assessed across weeks 29 to 34.

Marked by the Program's report marker against the Template Specification. Countersigned by Dr. Eleanor.

The threshold, stated before the criteria

Four conditions. Every one must hold on every report.

#Condition
1All nine sections present. A missing section is not a deduction
2No fabricated content. Nothing asserted about the chart that the chart does not support
3Synthesis, not quotation. No verbatim passage from Beyond Human Design or Channel Master
4Priority order correct. Against the Channel Priorities sheet, and integration-only Channels named

Any one condition failing is a resubmission of that report. It is not a partial pass and it is not a Developing band.

⚠ This threshold exists because two people mark this gate. Without a stated pass line, a marker and a countersigner will apply different standards and the countersignature becomes a rubber stamp. The four conditions are objectively determinable, which is what makes them safe to delegate.

Two resubmissions on the same report escalate to Dr. Eleanor directly. She marks it herself, and the marker's assessment is set aside rather than appealed.

The rubric, once the threshold holds

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
Layer computationEvery layer's Channels computed correctly, prenatal paired with postnatal correctly per WorldOne pairing errorMore than one
Matrix filterEvery activated Gate correctly in or out of matrix, transit imprints accounted forImprints not accounted forFilter errors
Priority reasoningThe report says what the priority order implies. The top of the order is the substance of the reportOrder correct, report does not follow itReport follows frequency rather than priority
World-matched interpretationEach Channel read in the language of the World it is active inOne Channel read genericallyRead generically throughout
Sun and MoonCorrespondences confirmed and stated when exactConfirmed, not statedNot confirmed
Astrology sectionsNatal, dwad, current sky and eclipse thread complete, eclipse degrees approximate unless certainOne section thinA section missing, which is also a threshold failure
Keys and Action PointsAbout six of each, drawn from the priority order, actionable this weekSix of each, not drawn from the orderGeneric
Format and languageTypography, color, capitalisation, trademark placement, Teaching Notes all correctTwo or three errorsSystematic

Meets on all eight rows to pass. A single Developing row carries one revision, not a resubmission.

GATE 6 · READING PORTFOLIO AND ORAL DEFENSE

Assessed by Dr. Eleanor across weeks 29 to 34. All four criteria, weighted to restraint.

The omission rationale, and what constitutes a fail

This is the criterion the whole credential rests on and it is the one most open to a generous marker, so the failure conditions are named rather than left to judgment.

A rationale fails on any one of these.

1. It states that nothing was withheld. A reading in which a practitioner said everything they saw is either a reading of a chart rather than a person, or a rationale that was not attempted.

2. Everything listed is a lapse rather than a decision. Things the candidate did not notice at the time are not omissions. An omission is a choice, and a rationale that lists only oversights is describing incompetence rather than restraint.

3. No rule is given. A withholding justified only by preference or by how it felt is not accounted for. The candidate must name what they were following.

4. ⚠ Clinical material was withheld and the rationale treats the withholding as sufficient.

This is the failure most likely to be marked generously and it is the most serious. A candidate who writes that they chose not to raise the subject's depression, or the subject's disclosure about their drinking, and presents that as restraint, has confused withholding with referring. The referral protocol requires them to stop and connect the person to someone qualified. Saying nothing and continuing the reading is a Category Two failure wearing restraint as a costume, and it fails the gate rather than reducing the band.

⚠ And this failure is detectable from week 10. Milestone question 6 asks what the candidate chose not to say. A milestone answer describing withheld clinical material is this same failure, twenty-one weeks earlier, and the milestone rubric now escalates it within forty-eight hours rather than noting it. If it reaches Gate 6 undetected, the program failed the candidate before the candidate failed the gate.

5. The rationale itself breaches anonymization. Birth data, a full name, or a description of personal circumstances in the rationale is a fail, on one instance.

The rubric

MeetsDevelopingNot yet
Opening on the personThe chart is closed for the opening. The first thing said is a question, not a findingOpens with a finding, recoversReads the chart aloud from the top
World identificationIdentifies the World the subject is speaking from and answers in it, audibly, more than onceIdentifies onceAnswers throughout in their own dominant World
Clean questioningDeepens without leading. Grove credited in the report front matterTwo or three leading questionsLeads throughout
WitnessingEmotion is witnessed, not explainedOne explanation offeredExplains rather than witnesses
Priority deliveredThe subject leaves with the small number that matters, not the forty that are trueDelivers the order without reducing itDelivers everything
The boundary heldAny clinical material recognized, named, and referred. Any diagnostic question declined without losing the subjectDeclined awkwardlyAnswered, or continued past clinical material
The omission rationalePasses all five failure conditions above, and names a rule for each withholdingPasses the conditions, rules are thinFails any one condition
The defenseCan say why that reading, what was left out, and what they would do differentlyTwo of the threeCannot account for their own choices

Meets on all eight rows to pass. A Not yet on the boundary row or the omission row is a Not yet on the gate, regardless of the other six.

The oral defense

Thirty to forty-five minutes, one to one, with Dr. Eleanor.

One of the three readings, chosen by her.

Three questions, given to candidates in advance at group call 7. Why that reading. What did you leave out. What would you do differently.

A defense is not an ambush and the questions are published, because what is being assessed is whether the candidate can account for their own judgment, not whether they can be surprised.

Pass thresholds, attempts and remediation

PassMeets on every row of every gate
AttemptsOne further attempt per gate. No sooner than two weeks after the result, no later than eight
DevelopingOne revision, on the specific rows named. Not a full resubmission
Not yetOne further attempt, plus a named remediation, which is specific work and not a repeat of the same submission
Gate 5, threshold failureResubmission of that report. Two resubmissions on the same report escalate to Dr. Eleanor
Gate 6, failure on the boundary or omission rowsOne further attempt, on a new reading with a new subject. The failed reading is not revisable, because the judgment being assessed happened in the room
Coursework complete, gates not satisfiedStatement of completion of coursework. Not a certification, confers nothing, and does not entitle any use of the mark or designation

Appeals

An appeal is decided by Marvin Portner, M.D., in consultation with Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner and not decided by her.

Lodged in writing within fourteen days of the result, stating which row is disputed and why.

Gate 5 appeals have a genuinely independent chain. Raz marks, Dr. Eleanor countersigns, Marvin decides. Nobody reviews their own decision.

Gate 6 appeals in Cohort One, and the dated remedy

Cohort One condition. She is the sole assessor of Gate 6, so an appeal is Marvin reviewing his wife's decision. Stated plainly rather than presented as independence.

From Cohort Two: a certified graduate co-assesses Gate 6. Graduate assesses, Dr. Eleanor countersigns, Marvin decides. Nobody reviews their own decision, and the chain matches Gate 5's.

That is not a promise invented to close this gap. It is the facilitator pathway already designed into Cohort One's enrollment, which is why the remedy has a date rather than an intention.



5. THE MILESTONE REVIEW STANDARD

The review rubric

Not marked. Reviewed, with three possible outcomes.

OutcomeTriggerAction
NotedComplete, on time, question 6 answered substantivelyLogged. No response required
ReplyA question in field 5 that needs answering, or an answer in field 4 that suggests a competency gapFaculty replies in writing within five days
FlagQuestion 6 left blank or answered with nothing left out. Or a count in field 1 that is behind by more than two readings. Or field 4 blank on three consecutive milestonesRaised at the next mentor session
⚠ ESCALATEQuestion 6 describes withholding clinical material. A candidate who reports that they chose not to raise something clinical has already committed the Category Two failure in the Referral ProtocolImmediate. Faculty contacts the candidate within 48 hours and Dr. Eleanor is informed the same day. Not held for the next mentor session

⚠ Nothing left out is a flag, not an acceptable answer. A candidate who says they said everything either did not notice what they withheld or withheld nothing, and both need a conversation. This is the earliest available signal of a Gate 6 failure and it fires at week 10.

⚠ Field 4 blank on three consecutive milestones is a flag because a candidate reporting only improvement across nine weeks of learning to read is not reporting accurately.

⚠ The escalate row and Gate 6's fourth omission-rationale failure condition are the same failure, detected twenty-one weeks apart.

At week 10 it is a milestone answer. At week 31 it fails the credential.

A reviewer who notices it at week 10 and files it as a flag has converted a recoverable teaching moment into a certification failure, and that would be the program's error rather than the candidate's.

So the instruction to the reviewer is explicit: escalate, do not note. The candidate is contacted within forty-eight hours, the Referral Protocol is worked with them, and the incident is recorded against the referral competency rather than against their character.

This is the single most important line in the milestone rubric and it is the reason the rubric exists at all.

What faculty does with the series

At mentor session 6, week 27, all seven milestone answers to question 6 are read together as one input to portfolio readiness.

A candidate whose answers to question 6 have not changed in eighteen weeks is not ready for Gate 6, and that is a judgment stated here so it is not a surprise at week 27.

The escalation procedure, in operational form

Trigger. A milestone answer to question 6 that describes withholding clinical material.

StepWhoWhen
1Reviewer marks the submission ESCALATE, not FLAGOn review
2Dr. Eleanor informedSame day
3Faculty contacts the candidateWithin 48 hours
4The Referral Protocol worked through with the candidate, against the specific instanceWithin one week
5Recorded against the referral competency in the candidate's fileSame week
6Reviewed again at the next mentor session, and at every subsequent milestoneOngoing

Recorded against the competency, never against the candidate. A candidate who learns that answering question 6 honestly produces a disciplinary event will answer it thinly, and the instrument that detected the failure stops working. This is stated to candidates in the handbook and it must be true in practice or the whole rehearsal sequence collapses.

Two escalations on the same candidate is a Gate 4 conversation, not a Gate 6 surprise.


6. THE REPORT MARKER ROLE

THE ROLE

Proposed title: Report Marker and Chart Operations.

Not an assistant, and not a coordinator. Two distinct functions, both technical, and one of them is assessment.

Function one · Chart operations

WorkVolume, Cohort OneRate basis
Applicant charts, generated on arrival from 2 NovemberUnbounded. Assume 40Per chart
Shortlist Map summaries for Dr. Eleanor before interview12 to 15Per summary
Cohort charts, one per participant12Per chart
Practicum subject charts180, being 15 per candidatePer chart
Total charts≈232

The 232 is the corrected Dependency 0 number, not the 360 that was on the record. Peer readings work from the twelve cohort charts rather than requiring a chart per reading, and portfolio readings are drawn from practicum subjects.

Across roughly nine months that is about six charts a week, with a spike in November.

Function two · Gate 5 marking

WorkVolume
Portfolio reports marked against the Template Specification36, being 3 per candidateWeeks 27 to 31

Marking is compliance against a written standard, not judgment. Section 7 of the Specification is a list of markable behaviors with right answers: compute the layers, pair prenatal with postnatal correctly, filter against the matrix, order by Channel Priority, name what completes only in integration, synthesize without quoting, confirm Sun and Moon correspondences, keep eclipse degrees approximate unless certain.

Dr. Eleanor countersigns. She does not mark.

What is not in the role

Central fulfillment of student reports. See the finding below.

Gate 6. Assessed by Dr. Eleanor and not delegable in Cohort One.

Mentor sessions, teaching, or any live delivery.


A FINDING THAT REMOVES WORK FROM THIS ROLE

Model C says central fulfillment during the program, as a training control. On inspection there is nothing for it to fulfil.

The training control was that students should not produce unsupervised client reports. But practicum subjects are unpaid practice subjects and are explicitly not clients, so a student producing a report for one is not producing a client report. The control is already achieved by the subjects being unpaid and non-clients.

And Gate 5 requires student-produced reports. If central fulfillment produced them, there would be nothing for a candidate to be assessed on.

So central fulfillment is not a program function. It is the optional post-graduation service, and nothing more.

It stays in the business model, and that is where Model C's recurring revenue lives. The sales page line offering report fulfillment at practitioner rate is unaffected and stays as written. What comes out is only the assumption that it runs during the Program.

That removes a phantom workload of up to 216 reports from this role, which is the difference between a part-time engagement and a full-time one. Revision B of Phase 3 should be corrected on this point.


PRICING

⚠ All three rates are ASSUMED and they go to Raz, not to Dr. Eleanor. They are proposals against estimated time, not market figures.

UnitRateReasoning
Chart generated$15Roughly twenty minutes of work on an existing pipeline
Shortlist Map summary$40Interpretive rather than mechanical, and it feeds directly into Dr. Eleanor's interview
Portfolio report marked$60Roughly forty-five minutes against a written standard

Cohort One at those rates

Units
Charts232× $15$3,480
Map summaries15× $40$600
Reports marked36× $60$2,160
Total$6,240

Against Cohort One revenue of roughly $144,000 at twelve places, that is about 4.3 percent.

The load, spread. Roughly $6,240 across ten months is about $624 a month on average, concentrated in November for applicant work and in weeks 27 to 31 for marking.

Two alternatives worth putting to her

A monthly retainer covering an agreed volume band, which is simpler to administer and gives her predictable income. Roughly $700 a month for ten months is the same total.

An hourly rate. Total estimated hours are about 112, being 77 on charts, 8 on summaries and 27 on marking. At $55 an hour that is roughly $6,200, which arrives at the same place.

Per-unit is recommended because it scales into Cohort Two without renegotiation and because it makes the cost of each finding visible.


THE QUALIFICATION QUESTION

⚠ Raz will mark a certification gate without holding the certification. In Cohort One nobody holds it, so nobody can.

Three ways through it, and the middle one is what v9 of the Checklist now says.

Raz marks and signs alone. Cleanest for appeal independence, weakest on defensibility, because the marker holds no credential in the method.

Raz marks against the Specification checklist and Dr. Eleanor countersigns. Defensible, fast for Dr. Eleanor since countersigning is minutes rather than forty-five, and it keeps the substantive decision out of her hands. ⚠ Counsel must confirm that countersignature preserves the independence of the appeal rather than collapsing it. That is now question 11 in the Agreement.

Dr. Eleanor marks everything. Defensible on qualification and it puts 81 hours into three weeks and leaves the appeal to Marvin reviewing his wife on every gate.

From Cohort Two onward the question disappears, because Cohort One graduates hold the credential and can mark.


WHAT MUST HAPPEN BEFORE 2 NOVEMBER

#ItemWhy that date
1Raz's rates agreed, or her own figures obtainedApplicant charts start generating on 2 November
2Her engagement documented as a contractor agreementIt is now an assessment role and not an admin one
3The Gate 5 marking checklist built from Specification §7She cannot mark against a standard that has not been turned into a checklist
4Counsel on question 11, countersignature and appeal independenceBefore the Agreement is executed, not before 2 November
5The timing measurement, five reports with start and end timesThis week. It gates publication of the 235 and it also validates the $60 marking rate


7. APPEAL CHAINS

GateAssessed byCountersignedAppeal decided byIndependent
1, 2, 3Faculty, against answer keys—Marvin Portner, M.D.Yes
4Admin, completenessFacultyMarvin Portner, M.D.Yes
5Report markerDr. EleanorMarvin Portner, M.D.Yes. Nobody reviews their own decision
6, Cohort OneDr. Eleanor, sole—Marvin Portner, M.D.Partial. He is reviewing his wife's decision
6, Cohort Two onwardCertified graduateDr. EleanorMarvin Portner, M.D.Yes

Lodged in writing within fourteen days, naming the disputed row.

The Gate 6 limitation is a Cohort One condition with a dated remedy, and the remedy is the facilitator pathway already contracted at Cohort One enrollment rather than a fix invented to close the gap.


8. WHAT IS BLOCKED

#BlockerBlocksOwner
1The four World gate matrix membership lists. [M-SPIRITUAL] 15 Gates, [M-PHYSICAL] 25, [M-EMOTIONAL] 33Intensive II sessions 2, 3, 4 and 5. Gate 3 entirely. Every answer key derived from themCharles, or the Reading Template
2The eight-page Foundation Pattern sourceSession I-7 depth, RC-9Locate
3Provenance of the sixteen Pattern namesAttribution registerCheck
4Her own dwad treatment beyond p.124III-4, taught against Escobar meanwhileHer
5Transit imprints beyond one sentenceII-3 interpretationCAPTURE
6The rationale for the Integration composites ranking firstII-8CAPTURE
7A recorded reading, start to finishIII-6 cannot be delivered by anyone but herCAPTURE
8Her handling of clinical material in a live readingIII-7CAPTURE
9A moment of declining to consult the chartIII-7, and Gate 6's hardest criterionCAPTURE
10The color authority rulingEvery asset, Cindy's queueHer

Items 5 to 9 are the capture list. Four of them are the whole of Gate 6.

Everything else in this manual is buildable now.


End of Layer Two.

Session Specifications

The twenty-four sessions in detail.

For: Faculty


What is below

INTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT · Week 7 · 18 to 21 February 2027

I-1 · Body Map, Not Body Graph

I-2 · Your Own Chart, Page by Page

I-3 · The 88-Unit Rule

I-4 · The Five Types

I-5 · The Nine Centers

I-6 · What Is Not Interpreted

I-7 · Patterns of Orientation

I-8 · The Astrology You Need

INTENSIVE II · THE MAP · Week 18 · 6 to 9 May 2027

II-1 · Factor Structure and the Four Worlds

II-2 · The World Matrices

II-3 · Channel Formation and Transit Imprints

II-4 · Portals

II-5 · The 148 Channels and Channel Master

II-6 · Channel Priority

II-7 · Frequency Is Not Priority

II-8 · The Integration Composites

INTENSIVE III · THE READING · Week 28 · 15 to 18 July 2027

III-1 · The Specification as a Standard

III-2 · The Method Rules

III-3 · Synthesize, Never Quote

III-4 · The Astrology Chapters

III-5 · Keys and Action Points

III-6 · Delivering the Reading

III-7 · What You Do Not Say

27 sections, about 4,440 words. This is a long document.

Version 1 · 6 August 2026


SECTION 3 — THE TWENTY-FOUR INTENSIVE SESSIONS

Two sessions a day, four days, two hours each. Sixteen taught hours per intensive.

Day shape. 11:00 opening block, 30 min. 11:30 Session A, 120 min. 1:30 break, 45 min. 2:15 Session B, 120 min. 4:15 integration and what happens next, 45 min. 5:00 close.

The opening block differs by intensive. Intensive I opens on the candidate's own chart, because logs do not open until week 8 and there is no practice to report. Intensives II and III open on field reports.


INTENSIVE I · THE INSTRUMENT · Week 7 · 18 to 21 February 2027

Target: Gates 1 and 2 passable at the close.

I-1 · Body Map, Not Body Graph

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. State the Four Worlds and what each governs. Explain why one World is not enough. Locate the five components of the Mandala of Synthesis®. Derive four from two from one.

Source. Beyond Human Design pp.1 to 3 and p.84. Living From Soul Ch.2 to 6. Astrology Essentials Part I, Sacred Synthesis Components, and Part III with Illustration 4. SOURCED: Astrology Essentials opens with the Mandala, so the frame precedes the mechanics.

Teacher does. Opens with the thesis in her own words: Human Design maps one World and you live in four. Names the two itemised omissions from Beyond Human Design p.2. Draws the Mandala of Synthesis® and names all five components. Walks Yang and Yin, one becomes two becomes four, so the Four Worlds arrive derived rather than asserted.

Students do. Label a blank Mandala with all five components. Write, in one sentence each, what each World governs.

Exercise. Pairs. Each names a client who did everything right and did not change, and says which World the work was done in.

Materials. Mandala handout, blank and labeled. Illustration 4. Four Worlds reference card.

At the end they can. Explain the system's architecture and its derivation to a skeptical colleague without a chart in front of them.

I-2 · Your Own Chart, Page by Page

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. Separate Design from Personality activations. Read gate and line notation. Identify the thirteen planetary glyphs including Chiron.

Source. Human Design & Health, Personality and Design Calculations figure, which sits in the introductory material ahead of the Types chapter. SOURCED. Astrology Essentials Illustration 10. Cosmic Secrets pp.17 to 18 for Chiron.

Teacher does. Puts her own chart on screen and reads the page furniture before any interpretation. Names every glyph. Explains why Chiron is there and is not in Human Design.

Students do. Work on their own chart, generated from the birth data they gave at application. Mark Design and Personality columns. Circle every glyph they cannot name.

Exercise. Individual, then table review. Every candidate holds their own Map on day one, which is the strongest available start and costs nothing.

Materials. Each candidate's own chart, printed and on screen. Glyph reference sheet.

At the end they can. Point at any activation on their own chart and say what it is, without interpreting it.

I-3 · The 88-Unit Rule

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Name the four units. Name the eight layers, their windows and their Worlds. Derive the windows from the rule. State the halving relationship. Distinguish eight layers from ten printed charts.

Source. Science of Human Design p.5, which gives the rule ahead of the Type distribution at p.14. SOURCED. Template Specification §5 and §7. The printed chart, page 2, for the Integrated Vehicles.

Teacher does. Gives the rule: 88 solar degrees, 88 solar minutes, 88 lunar degrees, 88 lunar minutes, before and after birth, where minute means arcminute. Derives three of the four windows at the board from two rates of motion.

⚠ One exception is taught as an exception. 88 lunar arcminutes computes to roughly 160 minutes and the printed layer reads 90. Taught as an open question, not smoothed over.

Students do. Derive the eight windows from the rule and the two rates. Label all ten printed charts on their own Map.

Exercise. Tables race to derive the windows. First correct set explains it back.

Materials. Calculators. Layer naming sheet. Both sample charts.

At the end they can. Derive the eight windows from first principles and name all eight layers with their Worlds.

I-4 · The Five Types

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Name the five Types and their mechanical definitions. State the distribution. Explain how Type differs by layer. State the over-99% finding and what it measures.

Source. Human Design & Health, The Types chapter, which follows the introduction. SOURCED, chapter order. Science of Human Design Table 1.1 p.14 and pp.5, 84. Cosmic Secrets p.16 for the worked layer example.

Teacher does. Defines each Type mechanically. Gives the distribution. Works Cosmic Secrets p.16, a Manifestor in one layer and a Generator in another, on a real chart. Then the over-99% finding: roughly 34% are Manifesting Generators in the Mental/Waking World alone, over 99% in the Integrated Body Map. Stated as what it measures and nothing beyond.

Students do. Determine Type in each of their own eight layers.

Exercise. Tables compare. Whoever has the most Type variation across layers presents it.

Materials. Type definition card. Distribution table.

At the end they can. Determine Type per layer and explain why a one-World Type reading is incomplete.

I-5 · The Nine Centers

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Name and locate all nine. Read definition. Name the four Definition types. State that Center definition does not predict medical conditions. State that only the Mental/Waking and Physical/Biological Worlds carry the Solar Plexus.

Source. Human Design & Health, the Nine Centers chapter with a figure per Center. SOURCED, chapter order. Beyond Human Design p.2 for the medical finding, p.88 for the Solar Plexus, p.89 for intuition requiring Emotional/Angelic integration.

Teacher does. One Center at a time, using her own figures. Then the negative finding, stated plainly: medical conditions occur independently of Center definition, and language that treats an undefined Center as a vulnerability is disempowering.

Students do. Mark defined and undefined Centers in each of their own layers. Identify their Definition type.

Exercise. Scripted client questions. One candidate asks "does my undefined Throat mean I have thyroid problems," the other answers. Rotates through four scripts.

Materials. Nine Center figures. Definition type sheet. Scripted question cards.

At the end they can. Read Center definition across layers and decline a medical inference without losing the client.

I-6 · What Is Not Interpreted

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Explain why Profile carries no inferable interpretation. Explain why Lines are a mathematical artifact. Name what replaces each. Decline to interpret either.

Source. Science of Human Design p.4. Beyond Human Design p.1. Human Design & Health p.124 for Lines and the substitution of the sign with its dwad. Human Design & Health places Profiles and Lines last. SOURCED, chapter order.

Teacher does. Shows that Profile occurs at exactly the regularity the hexagram structure predicts, and that frequency does not vary across populations, so nothing can be inferred. Then the general principle: what is mathematically determined carries no information. Then p.124: the sign with its dwad yields more specific information than Lines do. Names Thyrza Escobar and Pamela Crane for the dwad technique.

⚠ The displacement principle is ASSUMED as a general rule. Both instances are hers. The generalisation is ours and is marked.

Students do. Write the two displacements and their replacements in their own words.

Exercise. Pairs. One plays a Human Design practitioner arguing for Profile. The other holds the finding without dismissing the person.

Materials. Displacement one-pager. Escobar citation.

At the end they can. Explain both displacements and decline both interpretations, with the reasoning and the attribution.

I-7 · Patterns of Orientation

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Locate the Sun's Gate. Read all six fields of a Patterns of Orientation entry. Name the sixteen Foundation Patterns, four variants each, and the six Pattern qualities. Read a Foundation Pattern as printed on a chart.

Source. Patterns of Orientation workbook, sixty-four rows, and its own header: statements for the Sun position and keynote instead of Profile. Template Specification §5 for the six qualities. Both sample charts for printed Patterns. SOURCED by substitution: it arrives immediately after I-6 removed what it replaces.

Teacher does. Reads her own entry aloud, all six fields. Then walks the sixteen Patterns and the four-variant structure resolving to sixty-four. Then reads Foundation Patterns off both sample charts.

⚠ Two open items are named to the room rather than hidden. The printed charts label everything a Foundation Pattern while the workbook distinguishes Foundation, Transitional and Changing. And the sixteen Pattern names are being checked for provenance.

Students do. Read their own entry, all six fields. Read the Foundation Patterns printed on their own chart.

Exercise. Trios. Each reads their own orientation statement aloud. The other two say whether it lands. The person is present, so the reading can be checked against what they already know, which is the whole argument for cohort charts.

Materials. Patterns of Orientation workbook, proofed. Pattern quality card. Own charts.

At the end they can. Read a person's orientation from the Sun's Hexagram, across all six fields.

I-8 · The Astrology You Need

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Read a tropical Placidus natal wheel. Name house rulerships and sign keynotes. Apply the four color coding rules. State why birth time precision matters.

Source. Astrology Essentials Parts II, IV and V, with the color key closing the book. SOURCED, chapter order: the mechanics follow the frame and the color key is last.

Teacher does. Wheel, houses, rulerships, keynotes. Then Part V: two minutes changes the Moon, and the 90-minute Physical layer makes minute-level precision consequential. Then the four color rules.

⚠ Color is taught as ASSUMED. Three palettes exist and none is authoritative. The four coding rules are hers and are taught as fact. The specific World hex values are flagged as provisional.

Students do. Read their own natal wheel. Color a supplied chart against the four rules.

Exercise. Two candidates with birth times two minutes apart compare charts. If nobody qualifies, a constructed pair is supplied.

Materials. Natal wheels for all twelve. Color key. Blank chart for coloring.

At the end they can. Read a natal wheel, apply the color rules, and explain to a client why birth time matters.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Gates 1 and 2 assessed. Peer dyad partners assigned. Tier One protocol issued.


INTENSIVE II · THE MAP · Week 18 · 6 to 9 May 2027

⚠ The four World gate matrices are a named variable throughout: [M-SPIRITUAL] 15 Gates, [M-PHYSICAL] 25 Gates, [M-EMOTIONAL] 33 Gates, [M-MENTAL] all 64.

Every session below is fully specified. The lists drop into the exercises and the answer keys without restructuring anything. Where a list is required, the session says which.

⚠ The order revises Pass 2 and the reason is logical rather than pedagogical. Pass 2 opened with the matrices and closed with factor structure. A candidate cannot filter Gates by World until they know what defines a World, so factor structure comes first. ASSUMED, with that reasoning.

II-1 · Factor Structure and the Four Worlds

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. Name the four factors and their Centers. State the Ajna and Crown dual membership. State the factor to World mapping. Explain the Sacral dual loading and the bridge it creates.

Source. Science of Human Design Tables 6.1 to 6.2 pp.75 to 79 and p.77 for the Sacral. Her April 5 slide, THE FOUR WORLD MATRICES. Her ruling of 5 August: Ajna and Crown are their own factor and also operate with the Sacral, the G/Self and the Throat.

Teacher does. Presents the four factors with loadings. Explains dual membership for Ajna, Crown and the Sacral. Gives the factor to World mapping and the gate counts, 15, 25, 33, 64. Explains the Sacral connecting the Spiritual/Archetypal and Emotional/Angelic Worlds.

Students do. Build the four factors from a supplied loading table. Map each to its World.

Exercise. Tables assemble the four Worlds from the nine Centers, unaided, then check against her table.

Materials. Loading table. Four World Matrices slide. Factor card.

At the end they can. State what defines each World in terms of Centers, factors and gate count.

Variable needed. None. This session teaches why the counts are what they are.

II-2 · The World Matrices

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. State the matrix rule. Determine, for a given layer, which activated Gates can form a Channel in that World and which cannot.

Source. Template Specification §7: each World reads only the Gates of its own matrix, Channels form only within a World whose matrix carries both Gates, and activated Gates outside a World's matrix are read as transit imprints.

Teacher does. States the rule. Issues the four lists. Works one layer of a supplied chart, marking every activated Gate as in-matrix or out.

Students do. Filter three supplied layers against the lists. Then filter their own eight layers.

Exercise. Individual, timed, against an answer key.

Materials. ⚠ [M-SPIRITUAL], [M-PHYSICAL], [M-EMOTIONAL] as printed reference cards. Answer keys for three worked layers.

At the end they can. Filter any layer against its World's matrix.

Variable needed. All three lists, plus keys derived from them.

II-3 · Channel Formation and Transit Imprints

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Form Channels within a World. Identify activated Gates that cannot form a Channel. Read those as transit imprints.

Source. Template Specification §7. CAPTURE: transit imprints exist as one sentence, unconscious predisposing perceptions, and need her expansion.

Teacher does. Forms Channels on a worked layer. Then the disposal rule: what happens to every activated Gate that cannot complete. In most layers that is the majority of them.

⚠ This is the thinnest source in the whole program. One sentence. Until it is captured, the session teaches the rule and states plainly that the interpretive treatment is under development.

Students do. Form all Channels in their own eight layers. List every leftover Gate per layer.

Exercise. Pairs check each other's Channel formation and imprint lists.

Materials. Matrix cards. Channel formation worksheet, eight layers.

At the end they can. Form Channels correctly and account for every activated Gate that does not.

Variable needed. All three lists.

II-4 · Portals

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Define a Portal. Identify Portals on a chart. Explain how Portals produce 148 Channels from 36.

Source. Beyond Human Design p.3 and the 34-57 worked example. ⚠ Glossary item: Portal means something different in the Triple Design Matrix, 2000. The 2024 meaning is current and both are taught so nobody is confused later.

Teacher does. Works 34-57 in full. Then shows how a Gate whose partner sits outside its World's matrix behaves.

Students do. Identify every Portal across their own eight layers.

Exercise. Tables build the arithmetic from 36 to 148 and check it against the book.

Materials. 34-57 worked example. Matrix cards. Portal worksheet.

At the end they can. Identify Portals and explain the 148.

Variable needed. All three lists.

II-5 · The 148 Channels and Channel Master

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Navigate the 148 entries. Use Channel Master's conditional structure. Match an interpretation to the World a Channel is active in. Proceed from the primary source when Channel Master has no block.

Source. Beyond Human Design, 148 entries, primary. Channel Master, 278 conditional blocks, secondary cross-reference. Template Specification §7: synthesize, never quote either.

Teacher does. Reads one Channel across three different World configurations from Channel Master. Then Channel 5-15, the only Channel carrying all fifteen configurations, because Gates 5 and 15 are the only pair present in all four matrices. Then 19-49, which has seven for the same reason.

⚠ Coverage is uneven and taught as such. Most Channels have three to six blocks. A candidate who draws an uncovered configuration works from Beyond Human Design, and that is a competency rather than a failure.

Students do. Read three of their own Channels, matching each to its World. One deliberately chosen where no block exists.

Exercise. Tables take the same Channel in four Worlds and compare their four readings.

Materials. Beyond Human Design. Channel Master. Coverage map showing which configurations have blocks.

At the end they can. Interpret a Channel in the language of the World it is active in, and handle a gap.

Variable needed. All three lists, for the World matching.

II-6 · Channel Priority

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Order a layer's Channels by Channel Priority. Name Channels completing only across layers or only in integration.

Source. Channel Priorities, forty-one entries, columns D and E. Template Specification §7: always name Channels that complete only across layers or only in integration, because these are frequently the person's highest priority energies.

Teacher does. Issues the sheet and explains how to read it. Orders a full chart live.

Students do. Order their own Channels across all eight layers.

Exercise. Individual, against a key.

Materials. Channel Priorities sheet, printed. Ordering worksheet.

At the end they can. Produce a correctly ordered priority list for any chart.

Variable needed. None.

II-7 · Frequency Is Not Priority

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Judge priority independently of frequency. Work her Channel 30-41 case.

Source. Her worked example: in the eclipse chart, Channel 30-41 appears in all eight layers and is the lowest priority Channel across all priorities, ranking forty-one of forty-one.

Teacher does. Presents 30-41 in all eight layers, invites the room to call it the dominant theme, then gives the ranking. This is the single most likely place a self-taught reader goes wrong and the session is built around that.

Students do. Four constructed cases where frequency and priority diverge.

Exercise. Pairs. One argues from frequency, the other from priority. Then swap.

Materials. The eclipse chart. Four constructed cases with keys. Priorities sheet.

At the end they can. Explain to a client why the thing appearing everywhere is not the thing to work on.

Variable needed. None.

II-8 · The Integration Composites

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Name the five composite Integration Channels. Explain why they rank above all thirty-six standard Channels. Identify them on a chart.

Source. Channel Priorities, where 10-57-34-20, 10-34-20, 20-57-34, 20-34, 10-57-34 and 10-34 occupy the top six ranks. Science of Human Design p.77 for the Sacral dual loading.

⚠ CAPTURE. The ranking exists and the rationale does not. Until captured, the session teaches the ranking as fact and the reasoning as her documented reading of the Sacral dual loading, marked as our reconstruction.

Teacher does. Shows the top of the priority sheet. Connects the composites to the Sacral bridging the Spiritual/Archetypal and Emotional/Angelic Worlds.

Students do. Identify any composites in their own chart. Those without any pair with those who have.

Exercise. Trios. Read one composite for its holder, present, and check it against what they know about themselves.

Materials. Priorities sheet. Composite reference card.

At the end they can. Identify and read the Integration composites, and say why they come first.

Variable needed. None.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Gate 3 assessed. Tier Two protocol issued. Practicum readings 6 to 15 open.


INTENSIVE III · THE READING · Week 28 · 15 to 18 July 2027

Target: Gates 5 and 6.

III-1 · The Specification as a Standard

Thursday, Session A

Objectives. Name all nine report sections in order. Apply the format, typography and language rules. Name the fixed text blocks.

Source. Template Specification §1 to §6 and §8. SOURCED: §2 is the order.

Teacher does. Walks all nine sections against a completed report. Gives the language rules: capitalisation, bolding, trademark placement, hyphenation. Names the Teaching Notes.

⚠ One fixed block is void and taught as void. The science paragraph has been withdrawn. Candidates are told it was withdrawn and why, because a graduate holding an old Specification would keep publishing it.

Students do. Audit a supplied report against the nine sections and the rules. Twelve deliberate errors are planted.

Exercise. Individual audit, then table comparison of what each found.

Materials. Template Specification, current version. Completed model report. Audit report with planted errors and a key.

At the end they can. Say whether a report meets the standard, and where it does not.

III-2 · The Method Rules

Thursday, Session B

Objectives. Execute §7 end to end. Compute each layer's Channels, pair prenatal with postnatal correctly, filter against the matrix, order by priority, name integration-only Channels, confirm Sun and Moon correspondences.

Source. Template Specification §7. SOURCED.

Teacher does. Works a chart from raw activations to an ordered, World-matched Channel list, narrating every rule as she applies it.

Students do. The same, on a supplied chart, against a key.

Exercise. Timed, individual. This is Gate 5's technical content and the drill is the assessment in rehearsal.

Materials. Supplied chart. §7 checklist, which is also Raz's marking checklist. Answer key.

At the end they can. Execute the method rules on any chart and check their own work against the checklist a marker will use.

III-3 · Synthesize, Never Quote

Friday, Session A

Objectives. Produce a Channel description from the primary source with no verbatim overlap.

Source. Template Specification §7: synthesize from Beyond Human Design using Channel Master as secondary, and never quote either. SOURCED: §7 places this before the astrology sections.

Teacher does. Takes one Channel entry and rewrites it three ways at three registers, showing what survives and what must change.

Students do. Synthesize four Channel descriptions. Submitted and scored for verbatim overlap.

Exercise. Pairs swap and mark each other's for overlap against the source.

Materials. Beyond Human Design. Channel Master. Overlap scoring sheet, which is a BUILD item.

At the end they can. Write a Channel description that is theirs and is faithful.

III-4 · The Astrology Chapters

Friday, Session B

Objectives. Produce the natal structure, house rulership, dwad and current sky sections. Identify eclipses in the prenatal and postnatal Solar windows and keep degrees approximate unless certain.

Source. Template Specification §2 and §7. Astrology Essentials Parts II, IV, V. Human Design & Health p.124 for the dwad. Escobar and Crane credited.

⚠ BUILD. The dwad technique has a published external derivation and her own treatment beyond p.124 is not located. Taught against Escobar, credited, and marked as ASSUMED until she supplies her own.

Teacher does. Produces each astrology section live. Derives a dwad. Locates the eclipse thread.

Students do. Produce all four astrology sections for one chart.

Exercise. Individual, then compared against her worked version.

Materials. Ephemeris access. Dwad reference. Eclipse tables for the cohort's birth years.

At the end they can. Produce every astrology section the Specification requires.

III-5 · Keys and Action Points

Saturday, Session A

Objectives. Select from the full ranked set what a person can act on. Produce about six Keys to Empowerment and about six Action Points.

Source. Template Specification §2, which closes with them. Beyond Human Design, where every one of the 148 entries carries both. SOURCED by position.

Teacher does. Takes a forty-item priority list and reduces it to six, saying out loud what she is discarding and why.

Students do. Reduce a supplied forty-item list to six Keys and six Action Points, with a written reason for each discard.

Exercise. Tables compare their six. Divergence is the lesson.

Materials. Supplied priority list. Keys and Action Points format sheet.

At the end they can. Produce Keys and Action Points a person can act on this week.

III-6 · Delivering the Reading

Saturday, Session B

Objectives. Identify which World a person is speaking from and answer in it. Run the chart, close it, and enter the session on the person. Deliver Stop, Observe, Align. Acknowledge rather than claim to understand.

Source. Beyond Human Design p.3. Four Worlds Mastery Weeks 1 to 4. The Soul Knows slide 7 for Stop, Observe, Align. Brugh Joy credited for acknowledgment. David Grove credited for Clean Language.

⚠ CAPTURE, and it is the whole of the credential. Three transcript instances have her running the chart, closing it, and going to the person, and none explains it. This session is built around recorded footage of her doing it. Until that exists, the session is a live demonstration by her and cannot be delivered by anyone else.

Teacher does. Delivers a full reading to a volunteer, in front of the room, with the chart closed for the first ten minutes.

Students do. Watch, then debrief what she did in those ten minutes.

Exercise. Trios. Reader, receiver, observer. Chart closed for the first ten minutes. Observer logs every point where the reader reached for the chart.

Materials. Recorded reading, CAPTURE. Observer log sheet. Clean Questions card, Grove credited.

At the end they can. Open a reading on the person rather than on the chart.

III-7 · What You Do Not Say

Sunday, Session A

Objectives. Recognize clinical material. Stop the reading. Refer, and say why. Decline to diagnose without losing the client. Decline to consult the chart when direct Knowing is available.

Source. The Referral Protocol, in full. CAPTURE for her handling of the moment. Three transcript instances for the refusal.

⚠ The Referral Protocol is drafted against external professional standards and not from her corpus, because her threshold is a licensed psychologist's threshold and a graduate's must be more conservative. Taught as standard of care, attributed as such.

Teacher does. Works the three referral categories. Then the refusal: a moment where she declines to look at the chart because she already Knows, and what told her.

Students do. Eight scripted scenarios, four requiring referral and four requiring only a stated boundary.

Exercise. Pairs, scripted. Then each writes their own referral list and has it checked.

Materials. Referral Protocol. Eight scenario cards. Referral list template. Recorded refusal, CAPTURE.

At the end they can. Recognize the line, stop, refer, and explain the boundary without losing the person.

III-8 · The Omission Rationale

Sunday, Session B

Objectives. Write a rationale for what was left out of a reading and why. Defend it.

Source. No source. This is the assessment instrument. BUILD. SOURCED by position: it is the last thing taught, and it is the credential.

Teacher does. Takes the reading she delivered in III-6 and writes the omission rationale for it in front of the room. Names everything she saw and did not say, and the rule she was following each time.

Students do. Write the omission rationale for the reading they gave in III-6's exercise.

Exercise. Pairs. Each reads their rationale aloud. The partner asks, once, why that thing was left out. The answer is the assessment in miniature.

Materials. Omission rationale form and rubric, both BUILD. Their III-6 observer logs.

At the end they can. Account for their own restraint in writing, which is what Gate 6 assesses.

Sunday 4:15 to 5:00. Portfolio requirements issued. Defense scheduling. Gate 4 pack due week 29.


Document Reconciliation

Every file and what was deleted.

For: Internal


Certification Program Build · Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner, Ph.D.

Prepared for Brendan McCauley, Growing Entrepreneur, LLC · 2026-08-06

Step 1 of the final consolidation. Fifty-nine files on disk.


TWO THINGS BEFORE THE TABLE

1. ⚠ Two documents cover the same sections and they disagree

CPD_sections_5_to_9_and_12.md and CPD_sections_5_to_9_12_13.md both contain sections 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 12. Almost identical length, produced a day apart, from the two parallel chats.

The second one contains three findings the first does not, and one of them contradicts a decision that is currently live in two documents.

The reference model's peer group rule is that peer clients are not discussed in peer group calls. What happens in a dyad stays in the dyad, and outside clients may be discussed with no names and no identifying details.

Our Section 11A consents a candidate's chart to be read by up to eleven peers and discussed in peer groups. The parallel version argues that is wrong, and narrows it: your chart is read by your dyad partner, and by peer group members only with you present.

That argument is stronger than what we have. Peer group practice on a chart whose owner is sitting in the room, able to say whether the reading landed, is the entire case for cohort charts, and it is better when the person is there.

Two smaller findings in that file are also not in ours. That the reference log format cannot be copied because it carries client name, phone and email in the first two columns, which our anonymization standard forbids outright. And that Section 1 has no reference model at all, because the Student Handbook scan has no text layer, confirmed twice.

⚠ The work order says do not revise content in this pass, so I have not. This is on the error list at the bottom, and it affects application field 5.6, Agreement Section 11A, Layer 1 and section 7 of the peer group protocol.

2. The figure audit passes

Twenty figure families, zero discrepant, across seventeen documents including the parallel-chat file. Exit code 0. Safe to proceed.


THE TABLE

CURRENT · 24 files

DocumentVersionSupersedesWhat it isFor
COVER_what_you_are_holding.md08-06—The one-page front sheet telling her what she is holding and where her attention is neededDr. Eleanor
Certification_Checklist_v14.pdfv14, 08-06v1 to v13The whole program on one printed page. Counts, dates, gates, pricesDr. Eleanor, team
Certification_Checklist_v2.htmllive source—HTML source for the Checklist. Misnamed. Generates v14, not v2Internal
LAYER_1_student_handbook.md08-06—What a candidate receives on day one, in her registerDr. Eleanor, students
LAYER_2_faculty_and_operations_manual.md08-06—Session specs, marking, escalation, appeal chains, marker roleInternal
LAYER_3_decision_register.md08-06—Thirty decisions in two lists, eight of them forksDr. Eleanor
CPD_sections_2_and_3.md08-06—The 31-week spine, and the 24 intensive session specificationsTeam
CPD_sections_1_4_10_11.md08-06—Handbook front matter, six gates, recorded core, group calls, milestonesTeam
CPD_sections_5_to_9_and_12.md08-05—Homework, dyads, peer groups, PIG, mentor sessions, logs, client agreementTeam · ⚠ conflict
CPD_sections_5_to_9_12_13.md08-05—Same sections plus 13, plus three findings the other lacksTeam · ⚠ conflict
CPD_sections_13_14_15_16.md08-06—Portfolio, rubrics, artifacts, electives, assumptions registerTeam
SALES_PAGE_cohort_one.md08-06—Sales page copy, practitioner registerTeam
APPLICATION_cohort_one_spec.md08-06—Build spec for the application form, nine sections, 40 fieldsTeam
DIRECT_APPROACH_mastery_graduates.md08-06—Emails 1A, 1B, 2, 3 to Mastery graduatesTeam
PARTICIPANT_AGREEMENT_draft_for_counsel.md08-06—21-section agreement draft with counsel questionsCounsel
PRODUCTION_SCHEDULE.md08-06—830 hours of build, working back from 4 January, with six named breaksTeam
ROLE_report_marker_and_chart_operations.md08-06—Raz's role, scope, volumes and ratesTeam
RECORDING_PLAN_chart_class.pdfv1, 08-06CAPTURE_PLAN_chart_classHalf-page recording plan for the four-hour classTeam
RECORDING_PLAN_chart_class.htmlv1, 08-06—HTML source for the aboveInternal
FWM_Workbook_Week05_...pdf08-06—The Four Worlds Integrated workbook, six pages. Already delivered and in useStudents
FWM_Workbook_Week05_...html08-06—HTML source for the aboveInternal
FIGURE_AUDIT.md08-06—The audit table and the eight discrepancies it foundInternal
STANDING_RULE_figure_changes.md08-06—Drop-in rule for the working rules, plus how to maintain the scriptInternal
figure_audit.py08-06—Runnable stale-value hunt. Exit 1 gates a sendInternal
CORRECTION_spelling_convention.md08-06—Drop-in for 01a. Not yet pasted into 01aInternal
CORRECTION_colour_authority.md08-05—Drop-in for 01 Part Seven and 01a. Not yet pastedInternal

SUPERSEDED · delete · 15 files

Redundant binaries and one dead draft. No unique content in any of them.

FileSuperseded by
Certification_Checklist_v2.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v3.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v4.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v5.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v6.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v7.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v8.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v9.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v10.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v11.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v12.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v13.pdfv14
Certification_Checklist_v1.htmlCertification_Checklist_v2.html
CAPTURE_PLAN_chart_class.pdfRECORDING_PLAN_chart_class.pdf
CAPTURE_PLAN_chart_class.htmlRECORDING_PLAN_chart_class.html

MERGED · content fully lives elsewhere · 6 files

FileMerged into
CAPTURE_BRIEF_and_PASSES_3_4_5.mdCPD_sections_2_and_3 and LAYER_2
CONTENT_OUTLINE_pass_1_and_2.mdCPD_sections_2_and_3
PASS_2_revision_A_and_messages.mdCPD_sections_2_and_3. The two messages to her were cancelled and never sent
PASS_3_revision_A.mdCPD_sections_2_and_3
PASS_3_revision_B.mdCPD_sections_2_and_3
CAPTURE_PLAN_three_targets.mdRECORDING_PLAN and PRODUCTION_SCHEDULE

⚠ RECORD · I am recommending against deleting these · 12 files

The work order says delete anything superseded. I am pushing back on twelve of them, once, and then I will do whatever you say.

Each of these is the only place a finding and its citation exist. Their conclusions moved into current documents. Their evidence did not.

FileThe unique thing in it
PHASE_1A_eleanor_content_inventory.mdThe only page-cited inventory of her entire corpus. Every source citation in the curriculum traces back to this and nothing else
PHASE_1B_artifact_ledger.mdThe reference-set ledger and the four-to-one ratio finding
PHASE_1C_lesson_plan_source_audit.mdThe audit proving the eight decks are not her work. If anyone ever proposes using them again, this is the answer
PHASE_1C_addendum_two_generations.mdThe March 28 against April 5 comparison, and the evidence her hand is in the second set
PHASE_1D_interpretive_apparatus.mdThe eight layers, the matrix rule, the gate counts, the 30-41 finding, all with sources. The single most load-bearing document in the project
PHASE_3_certification_architecture_map.mdThe original architecture and why the reading-a-person spine was chosen
PHASE_3_revision_A.mdThe licensing analysis, and why never-license was rejected
PHASE_4_competency_framework.mdThe fifty competencies mapped to source, module and assessment. The gates are built on this
PHASE_4_revision_A.mdThe dwad provenance and the referral-protocol reclassification
ARITHMETIC_RUN_sales_page_and_application.mdWhere the 192-chart figure and the assessment-load finding came from
CORRECTIONS_LOG_third_pass.mdThe Solar and Lunar Minute derivation. Closes a term 01a lists and never defines
CORRECTION_colour_authority.mdThe three-palette analysis and the Golden Dawn sourcing

Recommendation: a 09 - RECORD folder, not a delete list. Zero cost, and it is the difference between a program with a documented evidence base and one that asserts things.

The specific risk. If she asks in six months why Patterns of Orientation replaced Profile, or why the practicum is fifteen readings, or where 192 charts came from, the answer is in a deleted file.


THE DELETE LIST, CLEAN

Twenty-one files. No thinking required.

Certification_Checklist_v2.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v3.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v4.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v5.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v6.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v7.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v8.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v9.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v10.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v11.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v12.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v13.pdf
Certification_Checklist_v1.html
CAPTURE_PLAN_chart_class.pdf
CAPTURE_PLAN_chart_class.html
CAPTURE_BRIEF_and_PASSES_3_4_5.md
CONTENT_OUTLINE_pass_1_and_2.md
PASS_2_revision_A_and_messages.md
PASS_3_revision_A.md
PASS_3_revision_B.md
CAPTURE_PLAN_three_targets.md

Plus the twelve RECORD files if you overrule me. Say the word and they go in the same pass.


ERRORS FOUND, NOT FIXED IN THIS PASS

Per the work order.

#ErrorAffects
1⚠ Section 11A permits peer group discussion of an absent candidate's chart. The reference model forbids it and is right. Narrow to: dyad partner, and peer group only with the person presentAgreement §11A · Application field 5.6 · Layer 1 · peer group protocol
2Two documents cover sections 5 to 9 and 12 and only one contains three findings. One has to become canonicalCPD_sections_5_to_9_and_12 · CPD_sections_5_to_9_12_13
3Certification_Checklist_v2.html generates v14. Rename to Certification_Checklist_source.htmlInternal
4The spelling drop-in and the colour drop-in are written and not pasted into 01a or 0101, 01a
5PHASE_1C_addendum_two_generations.md was missed by the spelling pass and carries British formsThat file only
6Layer 1 was assembled before the section 13 attempt-cap edit and rebuilt once. Worth one diff check before it goes outLayer 1

WHAT IS MISSING FROM THE FOLDER STRUCTURE

Reading the Step 2 tree against what exists.

Five documents do not exist and are the Step 4 build: 00_READ_THIS_FIRST, The_Six_Gates_Explained, Who_Does_What, Decisions_For_Dr_Eleanor, Questions_For_The_Team.

Eight more are extractions from current documents, not new writing: What_Students_Learn_And_When, The_Three_Intensives, The_Recorded_Lessons, Homework_And_Due_Dates, Peer_Practice_Guide, Logs_And_Forms, Grading_Rubrics, If_A_Student_Does_Not_Pass, Pricing_And_Payment, Session_Specifications, Client_Agreement_Template, Referral_Protocol, Questions_For_Counsel.

One is a rename: 01_ONE_PAGE_SUMMARY.pdf is Checklist v14.

Every PDF in 01 through 07 needs the plain-language front page, which is thirteen front pages.

⚠ One item in the tree has no source: Referral_Protocol.pdf as a standalone. It currently exists only inside Layer 1 and inside the agreement by reference. It has to be lifted out as its own document, which is extraction, not writing.


Stopping here as instructed. Two answers needed: the RECORD folder, and which of the two section 5-to-9 documents is canonical.

Standing Rule · Verification

Verify against the printed text.

For: Internal


Addition to the project working rules. Sits alongside the stale-value rule.


DROP-IN TEXT

Verification

Every principle, quotation and claim that reaches a student-facing page is verified against the printed text.

The canon extractions are an index, not a source. They tell you a finding exists and where to look. They do not carry her sentence, and four times now a finding has been carried forward with her wording lost.

#What was carriedWhat the printed page actually said
1Profile carries no inferable interpretationAnd she built a sixty-four-row instrument to replace it
2Lines are a mathematical artifactAnd the sign with its dwad yields more, credited to Escobar and Crane
3A garbled science claim treated as needing replacementHer original sentence was in the book, on every page's running header
4Everybody has all sixty-four GatesWhile dreaming, all 64 Gates are activated, creating a portal. A different claim

Two of those four reached a client-facing document before being caught.

What verification means in practice

Quotations: read the page. Not the extraction, not a prior document, not a note.

Claims: confirm the wording, then confirm what the claim is actually about. Item 4 above was verified as existing and was still wrong, because the finding was real and the subject was not what we thought.

Tables and figures: read the source file. The Channel Priority order and the sixteen Foundation Patterns in the reference appendix were both re-read from the spreadsheet and the workbook rather than from earlier documents.

A negative result in an extraction is not a negative result in the corpus. If something is not in the index, it may still be on the page.

Where this applies hardest

Any page reproduced in more than one document. The Noble Energy® Principles page appears at the front of three manuals, so an error on it appears three times.

Anything in her voice. A misquotation in her own words is worse than a paraphrase, because it cannot be defended as ours.

Figure Audit

Twenty figure families, and the eight it caught.

For: Internal


Certification Program Build · Dr. Eleanor Haspel-Portner, Ph.D.

Prepared for Brendan McCauley, Growing Entrepreneur, LLC · 2026-08-06

Sixteen live documents. Eight discrepancies found, all resolved. Repeatable.


WHY THIS EXISTS

Two instances of the same error class in two days. The founding rate at $9,997 on the Checklist against field 9.3 saying $14,997 or $12,000. Then 235 hours in agreement Section 1 after the reprice to 296.

Both were a figure that changed in one document and stayed in another. This audit is the third instance not happening.

The sixteen live documents

Checklist source · Sales page · Application spec · Direct approach emails · Participant agreement · Cover · Layer 1 handbook · Layer 2 manual · Layer 3 register · CPD sections 2 and 3 · CPD sections 1, 4, 10, 11 · CPD sections 5 to 9 and 12 · CPD sections 13 to 16 · Production schedule · Role definition · Recording plan.

Superseded working documents are excluded by design. The phase documents, revisions and correction notices record earlier states and must keep their original figures, or the record of what changed is destroyed.


THE AUDIT

Legend. ✓ present and correct. · figure does not appear in that document. ✗ was wrong, now fixed.

Money

FigureCanonicalChkSalesAppEmailAgmtCoverL1CPD
Tuition$14,997✓✓✓·✓✓✓✓
With Mastery credit$12,000✓✓✓✓✓✓✓·
Paid in full$13,497✓✓✓·····
Paid in full, credited$10,500✓✓✓✓····
Monthly7 × $2,143✓✓······
Monthly, credited7 × $1,715✓✓·✓····
Mastery$2,997✓✓✓✓✓✓✓·
Founding ratenone, withdrawn✓✓✓✓✗✓··
Specialization$3,000–$5,000✓·······
Report / reading$397 / $750·✓✓··✓·✓
Marker rates$15 / $40 / $60·······Role ✓

Program shape

FigureCanonicalChkSalesAppEmailAgmtCoverL1CPD
Program hours296✓✓··✗✓✓✓
Instructional hours272·✓·····✓
Durationeight months✓✓✗✓✗✓✓✗
Weekly loadnine hrs, practice cycles·✓✓··✓·✗
Cohort cap12✓✓✓✓✓✓✓·
Logged sessions61✓·····✓✓
Logged hours135✓·····✓✓
Readings delivered30✓✓··✓✓✓✓
Practicum split5 Tier One / 10 Tier Two✓···✓·✓✓
Portfolio3 readings, 22.5 hrs✓···✓·✓✓
Recorded core12 modules, 30 hrs✓···✓·✓✓
Elective range6 to 30 hrs✓✓····✓✓
Charts required≈192··✓····Role ✓

Dates

DateCanonicalChkSalesAppEmailAgmtCoverL1CPD
Enrollment opensMon 2 Nov 2026·✓✓✓·✓··
Applications closeFri 20 Nov 2026·✓✓✓····
NotificationMon 30 Nov 2026·✓✓✓····
Interviews1 to 9 Dec 2026·✓✗✗····
Offers7 to 18 Dec 2026··✓·····
Week 1Mon 4 Jan 2027·✓✓✓✗✓✓✓
Intensive IThu 18 to Sun 21 Feb 2027✓✓✓·✓✓✓✓
Intensive IIThu 6 to Sun 9 May 2027✓✓✓·✓✓✓✓
Intensive IIIThu 15 to Sun 18 Jul 2027✓✓✓·✓✓✓✓
Portfolio windowswk 28, 29, 30✓✓✓·✓·✓✓
Assessment19 Jul to 29 Aug 2027✓✓✓·✗✓✓✓
Graduationwk of 20 Sep 2027✓✓✓✓✗✓✓✓
Gate lists deadline1 Mar 2027·······Sched ✓

Weeks

ItemCanonicalVerified in
Milestones10, 13, 15, 17, 21, 24, 27Checklist, spine, L1, L2, section 11 ✓
Group calls6, 10, 14, 17, 20, 24, 27Spine ✓, section 10 ✗ call 7 said week 30, L2 ✗
Mentor sessions10, 15, 20, 23, 25, 27Spine ✓, section 9 ✓, L1 ✓
Gate 1week 7Checklist ✓, L1 ✓
Gate 2week 7Checklist ✓, L1 ✓
Gate 3week 18Checklist ✓, L1 ✓
Gate 4week 29Checklist ✓, L1 ✓, agreement ✓
Gate 5weeks 29 to 34Checklist ✓, L1 ✓, section 13 ✓
Gate 6weeks 29 to 34Checklist ✓, L1 ✓, section 13 ✓
Referral list dueweek 11Spine ✓, section 14 ✓, L1 ✓
Dyads open / close8 / 19Spine ✓, L1 ✓
PIG open / close12 / 27Spine ✓, L1 ✓
Peer groups open / close14 / 27Spine ✓, L1 ✓
Practicum Tier One13 to 17Spine ✓, L1 ✓
Practicum Tier Two19 to 27Spine ✓, L1 ✓

THE EIGHT DISCREPANCIES, AND WHAT CAUSED EACH

#DocumentWasNowCause
1Agreement §1235 hours296Reprice not propagated to the agreement
2Agreement §2Week One begins Monday 5 October 2026Monday 4 January 2027Survived the entire move from an October to a January cohort. The oldest error in the set
3Agreement §2Assessment window 19 April to 9 May 202719 July to 29 August 2027An earlier replacement string did not match and the miss was not checked
4Agreement §3 and §16Founding rate $9,997, two structures openWithdrawn. Structure B settledDecision made in chat, applied to the Checklist, never applied to the agreement
5Section 1 handbookseven-month certificationeight-monthDuration change propagated to customer-facing copy but not to the source section
6Section 10 and Layer 2Call 7 · Week 30Week 27Call moved in the spine, not in its own agenda
7Application specinterviews 1 to 4 December1 to 9 DecemberInterview window extended in the table, not in the prose above it
8Emails and section 230 Nov to 4 Dec, and eight hours a week1 to 9 December, nine hoursSame class

The pattern in all eight

Six of the eight were a figure changed in a table and left in prose, or changed in a summary and left in the source.

And the two worst were in the agreement, which is the document going to counsel and the one nobody re-reads because it is long. Items 2 and 4 would both have reached counsel.


RUNNING THIS AGAIN

The audit is a script, not a reading. It hunts stale variants rather than confirming correct ones, because a missing figure is invisible and a stale figure is findable.

Run it whenever a figure changes, before anything is sent to her, to counsel, or to a candidate.

One rule that would have prevented six of the eight. When a figure changes, search for the old value across every live document before writing the new one anywhere. The search takes a minute and it is the whole audit.

⚠ Three legitimate exceptions the audit must keep allowing. CPD sections 2 and 3 contain 235 and six and a half hours inside the reprice narrative and the carry-forward table, where they record what was corrected. The production schedule says Charles has seven months, which is elapsed time from August to March. Removing those would destroy the record of what changed.


16 figure families clean, 0 discrepant, as of 6 August 2026.

Report Marker Role

Raz's scope, volumes and rates.

For: Internal


Certified Practitioner, Noble Energy® Maps · Cohort One

Prepared for Brendan McCauley, Growing Entrepreneur, LLC · 2026-08-05

Raz. To be defined and priced before enrollment opens on 2 November.


WHY THIS DOCUMENT EXISTS

Raz's role has never been defined beyond running charts, and four separate findings have now landed work on it.

She is the only person other than Dr. Eleanor who has produced a report to the Template Specification. That makes her the only available Gate 5 marker, and Gate 5 delegation is what brings the assessment load from 81 hours in three weeks down to something a founder can carry.

The Checklist names who completes the mentor evaluation and, until v9, said nothing about who marks Gate 5. That is now corrected on the face of it.


THE ROLE

Proposed title: Report Marker and Chart Operations.

Not an assistant, and not a coordinator. Two distinct functions, both technical, and one of them is assessment.

Function one · Chart operations

WorkVolume, Cohort OneRate basis
Applicant charts, generated on arrival from 2 NovemberUnbounded. Assume 40Per chart
Shortlist Map summaries for Dr. Eleanor before interview12 to 15Per summary
Cohort charts, one per participant12Per chart
Practicum subject charts180, being 15 per candidatePer chart
Total charts≈232

The 232 is the corrected Dependency 0 number, not the 360 that was on the record. Peer readings work from the twelve cohort charts rather than requiring a chart per reading, and portfolio readings are drawn from practicum subjects.

Across roughly nine months that is about six charts a week, with a spike in November.

Function two · Gate 5 marking

WorkVolume
Portfolio reports marked against the Template Specification36, being 3 per candidateWeeks 27 to 31

Marking is compliance against a written standard, not judgment. Section 7 of the Specification is a list of markable behaviors with right answers: compute the layers, pair prenatal with postnatal correctly, filter against the matrix, order by Channel Priority, name what completes only in integration, synthesize without quoting, confirm Sun and Moon correspondences, keep eclipse degrees approximate unless certain.

Dr. Eleanor countersigns. She does not mark.

What is not in the role

Central fulfillment of student reports. See the finding below.

Gate 6. Assessed by Dr. Eleanor and not delegable in Cohort One.

Mentor sessions, teaching, or any live delivery.


A FINDING THAT REMOVES WORK FROM THIS ROLE

Model C says central fulfillment during the program, as a training control. On inspection there is nothing for it to fulfil.

The training control was that students should not produce unsupervised client reports. But practicum subjects are unpaid practice subjects and are explicitly not clients, so a student producing a report for one is not producing a client report. The control is already achieved by the subjects being unpaid and non-clients.

And Gate 5 requires student-produced reports. If central fulfillment produced them, there would be nothing for a candidate to be assessed on.

So central fulfillment is not a program function. It is the optional post-graduation service, and nothing more.

It stays in the business model, and that is where Model C's recurring revenue lives. The sales page line offering report fulfillment at practitioner rate is unaffected and stays as written. What comes out is only the assumption that it runs during the Program.

That removes a phantom workload of up to 216 reports from this role, which is the difference between a part-time engagement and a full-time one. Revision B of Phase 3 should be corrected on this point.


PRICING

⚠ All three rates are ASSUMED and they go to Raz, not to Dr. Eleanor. They are proposals against estimated time, not market figures.

UnitRateReasoning
Chart generated$15Roughly twenty minutes of work on an existing pipeline
Shortlist Map summary$40Interpretive rather than mechanical, and it feeds directly into Dr. Eleanor's interview
Portfolio report marked$60Roughly forty-five minutes against a written standard

Cohort One at those rates

Units
Charts232× $15$3,480
Map summaries15× $40$600
Reports marked36× $60$2,160
Total$6,240

Against Cohort One revenue of roughly $144,000 at twelve places, that is about 4.3 percent.

The load, spread. Roughly $6,240 across ten months is about $624 a month on average, concentrated in November for applicant work and in weeks 27 to 31 for marking.

Two alternatives worth putting to her

A monthly retainer covering an agreed volume band, which is simpler to administer and gives her predictable income. Roughly $700 a month for ten months is the same total.

An hourly rate. Total estimated hours are about 112, being 77 on charts, 8 on summaries and 27 on marking. At $55 an hour that is roughly $6,200, which arrives at the same place.

Per-unit is recommended because it scales into Cohort Two without renegotiation and because it makes the cost of each finding visible.


THE QUALIFICATION QUESTION

⚠ Raz will mark a certification gate without holding the certification. In Cohort One nobody holds it, so nobody can.

Three ways through it, and the middle one is what v9 of the Checklist now says.

Raz marks and signs alone. Cleanest for appeal independence, weakest on defensibility, because the marker holds no credential in the method.

Raz marks against the Specification checklist and Dr. Eleanor countersigns. Defensible, fast for Dr. Eleanor since countersigning is minutes rather than forty-five, and it keeps the substantive decision out of her hands. ⚠ Counsel must confirm that countersignature preserves the independence of the appeal rather than collapsing it. That is now question 11 in the Agreement.

Dr. Eleanor marks everything. Defensible on qualification and it puts 81 hours into three weeks and leaves the appeal to Marvin reviewing his wife on every gate.

From Cohort Two onward the question disappears, because Cohort One graduates hold the credential and can mark.


WHAT MUST HAPPEN BEFORE 2 NOVEMBER

#ItemWhy that date
1Raz's rates agreed, or her own figures obtainedApplicant charts start generating on 2 November
2Her engagement documented as a contractor agreementIt is now an assessment role and not an admin one
3The Gate 5 marking checklist built from Specification §7She cannot mark against a standard that has not been turned into a checklist
4Counsel on question 11, countersignature and appeal independenceBefore the Agreement is executed, not before 2 November
5The timing measurement, five reports with start and end timesThis week. It gates publication of the 235 and it also validates the $60 marking rate

THE TWO MEASUREMENTS, RESTATED

Time per report, from Raz. Five reports, start and end times. Gates publication of the 235. It also sets the practicum allowance, the portfolio allowance, and confirms whether $60 a report is right for marking.

Time per Map read, from Dr. Eleanor. Sets the interview window and the shortlist cap. One question, not a study.

Charles gets the gate matrix question separately and that blocker is unchanged.


ASSUMPTIONS ADDED

#AssumptionReasoning
23Raz is the Gate 5 markerThe only person other than Dr. Eleanor who has produced a report to the Specification
24Dr. Eleanor countersigns Gate 5 rather than marking itPreserves defensibility at minutes per report instead of forty-five, and keeps the substantive decision out of her hands for appeal purposes
25Rates of $15, $40 and $60Proposals against estimated time. Nobody has asked her
26Central fulfillment is not a program function, and remains the post-graduation servicePracticum subjects are not clients, and Gate 5 requires student-produced reports. Model C's recurring revenue is unaffected
27Applicant volume assumed at 40No basis. It is the number that sets the November load and the first real read arrives in week one of enrollment

Twenty-six live assumptions. Five added, and assumption 26 removes work rather than adding it.


End of role definition. Not agreed with Raz.

figure_audit.py

The script that hunts stale numbers.

For: Internal


#!/usr/bin/env python3
"""
figure_audit.py — stale-value hunt across the live document set.

Hunts OLD values rather than confirming new ones. A missing figure is
invisible; a stale figure is findable. Run before anything goes to
Dr. Eleanor, to counsel, or to a candidate.

    python3 figure_audit.py [directory]

Exit code 0 = clean, 1 = discrepancies found.
"""
import pathlib, sys

LIVE = [
    "_HTML_SOURCE/Certification_Checklist_source.html", "_WORKING_MD/SALES_PAGE_cohort_one.md",
    "APPLICATION_cohort_one_spec.md", "DIRECT_APPROACH_mastery_graduates.md",
    "PARTICIPANT_AGREEMENT_draft_for_counsel.md", "COVER_what_you_are_holding.md",
    "LAYER_1_student_handbook.md", "LAYER_2_faculty_and_operations_manual.md",
    "LAYER_3_decision_register.md", "CPD_sections_2_and_3.md",
    "CPD_sections_1_4_10_11.md", "CPD_sections_5_to_9_and_12.md",
    "CPD_sections_13_14_15_16.md", "PRODUCTION_SCHEDULE.md",
    "ROLE_report_marker_and_chart_operations.md", "RECORDING_PLAN_chart_class.html",
]

# canonical family -> stale strings that must not appear
STALE = {
    "296 program hours":        ["approximately 235", "| 235 |", "**235**", "233 hours", "225 hours"],
    "272 instructional hours":  ["211 are instructional", "211 instructional"],
    "Eight months":             ["seven-month", "seven months"],
    "$13,497 paid in full":     ["$13,997"],
    "7 x $2,143 monthly":       ["$2,247"],
    "No founding rate":         ["$9,997", "$11,997"],
    "61 logged sessions":       ["| 71 |", "71 sessions"],
    "135 logged hours":         ["108.5"],
    "Nine hours a week":        ["eight hours a week", "six and a half hours", "roughly six hours a week"],
    "Intensive II 6-9 May":     ["29 April to 2 May", "29 Apr to 2 May"],
    "Applications close 20 Nov":["18 September", "25 September"],
    "Notification 30 Nov":      ["Wednesday 25 November", "by Monday 28 September"],
    "Interviews 1-9 Dec":       ["1 to 4 Dec", "30 November to 4 Dec"],
    "Week 1 = 4 Jan 2027":      ["5 October 2026", "Monday 5 October"],
    "Assessment 19 Jul-29 Aug": ["19 April to 9 May", "19 July to 8 August", "weeks 29 to 31", "Wk 29-31", "Wk 29\u201331"],
    "Graduation wk of 20 Sep":  ["Week of 10 May", "Week of 9 August", "graduates in August"],
    "Calls 6,10,14,17,20,24,27":["Call 7 \u00b7 Week 30", "6, 9, 13, 17", "22, 26 and 30", "20, 24, 30"],
    "Gates 5/6 wk 29-34":       ["<i>Week 30.</i>", "<i>Week 31.</i>"],
    "Referral list week 11":    ["referral list due week 25"],
    "~192 charts":              ["360 charts, unscoped"],
}

# (document, substring-of-stale) pairs that are legitimate historical record
ALLOW = {
    ("CPD_sections_2_and_3.md", "235"),
    ("CPD_sections_2_and_3.md", "six and a half hours"),
    ("PRODUCTION_SCHEDULE.md", "seven months"),
    ("PARTICIPANT_AGREEMENT_draft_for_counsel.md", "$9,997"),
    ("CPD_sections_13_14_15_16.md", "seven months"),
}

def allowed(fname, stale):
    return any(fname == f and key in stale for f, key in ALLOW)

def main(root="."):
    root = pathlib.Path(root)
    text = {}
    missing = []
    for f in LIVE:
        p = root / f
        if p.exists():
            text[f] = p.read_text()
        else:
            missing.append(f)

    print("FIGURE AUDIT  ---  %d live documents" % len(text))
    if missing:
        print("  ! not found: " + ", ".join(missing))
    print("=" * 60)

    clean = bad = 0
    for canon, stales in STALE.items():
        hits = set()
        for st in stales:
            for f, t in text.items():
                if st and st in t and not allowed(f, st):
                    hits.add("%s -> \"%s\"" % (f, st))
        if hits:
            bad += 1
            print("DISCREP  " + canon)
            for h in sorted(hits):
                print("           " + h)
        else:
            clean += 1
            print("OK       " + canon)

    print("=" * 60)
    print("%d clean, %d discrepant" % (clean, bad))
    print("\nAllow-listed historical mentions: %d" % len(ALLOW))
    return 1 if bad else 0

if __name__ == "__main__":
    sys.exit(main(sys.argv[1] if len(sys.argv) > 1 else "."))

Why each choice was made, with sources. Nobody has to read this.

Index

What each of thirteen files uniquely proves, and where to look.

For: Anyone who asks why


What each file in this folder uniquely proves

Version 1 · 6 August 2026


Why this folder exists

These twelve files are superseded. Their conclusions moved into the current documents.

Their evidence did not.

Each one is the only place a finding and its source citation exist together. Nobody needs to read them. They are here so that if anyone asks in a year why something was decided, the answer exists.


The index

FileWhat it uniquely provesLook here if someone asks
PHASE_1A_eleanor_content_inventory.mdEvery teaching concept in her corpus, with page citations. Seventy-nine items, tagged for whether they can be taught fromWhere any piece of curriculum came from
PHASE_1B_artifact_ledger.mdThe reference credential's structure, and that student practice outnumbers faculty teaching four to oneWhy the program is built on peer practice
PHASE_1C_lesson_plan_source_audit.mdThat the eight AI lesson decks are not her work. Her science week contained none of her research, the teaching order was inverted, and it taught three things she published findings againstWhy the decks were not used
PHASE_1C_addendum_two_generations.mdThe March 28 set against the April 5 set, and the evidence her own hand is in the second oneWhether she approved any of it
PHASE_1D_interpretive_apparatus.mdThe eight layers named, the matrix rule, the four gate counts, and Channel 30-41 at rank 41 of 41. With sources for eachWhy the eight layers are what they are, and where the gate counts come from
PHASE_3_certification_architecture_map.mdWhy the credential certifies reading a person rather than reading a chartWhy the program is shaped this way
PHASE_3_revision_A.mdWhy the interpretive method is licensed to graduates rather than withheldWhy graduates get the specification
PHASE_4_competency_framework.mdFifty competencies, each mapped to a source, a module and an assessmentWhy each gate tests what it tests
PHASE_4_revision_A.mdThat dwads come from Escobar and Crane, and why the referral protocol is not from her corpusWhy the referral rules are not in her voice
ARITHMETIC_RUN_sales_page_and_application.mdWhere 192 charts came from, and that Gate 6 grading is 57 hoursWhy the chart count halved, and why assessment moved
CORRECTIONS_LOG_third_pass.mdWhat Solar Minute and Lunar Minute mean. Arcminutes in the 88-unit calculation, which closes a term 01a lists and never definesWhat those two terms mean
CORRECTION_colour_authority.mdThree color palettes exist, none is authoritative, and her published key follows the Golden Dawn systemWhich colors are hers and which are ours
CPD_sections_5_to_9_and_12.mdThe earlier version of the peer practice design, before the consent rule was narrowedWhy Section 11A changed

The one question this folder answers best

Why did Patterns of Orientation replace Profile?

Because Profile occurs at exactly the regularity the hexagram structure predicts, so nothing can be inferred from it. She published that finding twice. And she built a sixty-four-row instrument to put in its place, keyed to the Sun's Hexagram.

The finding is in PHASE_1A. The instrument is in PHASE_1D. Neither is in any current document, because current documents say what the program does rather than why.

What a candidate holds during each intensive.

Noble Energy® Principles

Thirteen lines. Twelve are your words.

For: Students


Reproduced identically at the front of all three intensive manuals.

Thirteen lines. Twelve are her words. One is flagged.


1. Every person who ever came to me came because nobody recognized their soul.

2. You're reading a person, you're not reading a chart.

3. Incomplete, not wrong.

4. You are not conditioned. You are socialized to your culture, but you are not conditioned.

5. Conditioning implies an automated response that is hard to change. Socialization is simply learning the customs and practices of your environment.

6. It is only when your Mental World comes under your conscious control that you begin to exercise your Free Choice.

7. Do not attempt to memorize all the nuances. You will learn them as you practice doing readings.

8. Use them as tools for discovery, not as rules to follow. Make them your own. Color outside the lines.

9. Trust your process more than any external authority, including me.

10. Facilitate change without undermining a person's self-esteem or core being.

11. Stop calling it shyness or defiance, or any other label.

12. Not all information is available to you in each World all the time.

13. Always ask what World you are in, and what skill you want to use.


On line 3. Incomplete, not wrong is her position on the Human Design system. It maps one of your four Worlds accurately, and it does not map the other three. Beyond Human Design p.84.


SOURCING

#StatusSource
1VERBATIMManifest Your Dreams, 2026-04-16
2VERBATIMManifest Your Dreams transcript
3VERBATIMBeyond Human Design pp.1 to 2 · Human Design & Health p.xv
4VERBATIMLiving From Soul, preface. Confirmed from the printed text
5VERBATIMLiving From Soul, preface. Confirmed from the printed text
6VERBATIMCosmic Guidance. Confirmed from the printed text
7CONDENSED, nothing addedBeyond Human Design p.4
8VERBATIMLiving From Soul, preface
9VERBATIMLiving From Soul, preface · Cosmic Secrets p.8
10⚠ CONDENSED, AND REGISTER CHANGEDLiving From Soul, preface. Hers describes her own motivation. Turning it into an instruction to a student changes her voice. GOES TO HER AS A QUESTION
11VERBATIMThe Soul Knows, the Align step
12NEAR VERBATIMStep Over The Threshold, Day 5
13NEAR VERBATIM, shortenedStep Over The Threshold, Day 5

Why lines 4 and 5 are two lines and not one

Line 4 is the claim. Line 5 is the argument.

It is her doctrinal break from Human Design orthodoxy, and it is the one place she contradicts the received framework outright rather than calling it incomplete.

That belongs on the page a student reads on day one, with the reasoning attached.

Two candidates dropped

Mastery takes years. Not in Astrology Essentials in any form. Not carried.

All sixty-four Gates. The claim is not that everybody has all sixty-four. Cosmic Secrets p.13 says that while dreaming, all 64 Gates are activated, creating a portal that allows us to receive communication from the unified integrated field of consciousness. That is a fact about the dream state rather than a principle. It is in the reference appendix, section 10.

Intensive I · The Instrument

Eight sessions, a writing layout.

For: Students


What is below

Noble Energy® Principles

What These Four Days Are For

Session 1 · Body Map, Not Body Graph

The thesis

The Mandala of Synthesis®

Where four comes from

Session 2 · Your Own Chart, Page by Page

What is on the page

Chiron

Session 3 · The 88-Unit Rule

The rule

What that gives you

Session 4 · The Five Types

The five

The distribution

Type differs by layer

Session 5 · The Nine Centers

The nine

Definition

Two findings that go together

Session 6 · What Is Not Interpreted

Profile

Lines

What both have in common

Session 7 · Patterns of Orientation

What replaces Profile

35 sections, about 1,932 words. This is a long document.

Noble Energy® Principles

1. Every person who ever came to me came because nobody recognized their soul.

2. You're reading a person, you're not reading a chart.

3. Incomplete, not wrong.

4. You are not conditioned. You are socialized to your culture, but you are not conditioned.

5. Conditioning implies an automated response that is hard to change. Socialization is simply learning the customs and practices of your environment.

6. It is only when your Mental World comes under your conscious control that you begin to exercise your Free Choice.

7. Do not attempt to memorize all the nuances. You will learn them as you practice doing readings.

8. Use them as tools for discovery, not as rules to follow. Make them your own. Color outside the lines.

9. Trust your process more than any external authority, including me.

10. Facilitate change without undermining a person's self-esteem or core being.

11. Stop calling it shyness or defiance, or any other label.

12. Not all information is available to you in each World all the time.

13. Always ask what World you are in, and what skill you want to use.

Line 3 is my position on the Human Design system. It maps one of your four Worlds accurately, and it does not map the other three.

What These Four Days Are For

You have spent five weeks in the Four Worlds.

You understand them, and you can feel which one you are in.

You cannot yet look at a chart and tell me anything.

These four days are for that, and only that.

By Sunday you will hold your own Noble Energy® Maps and be able to say what is on every page of them.

You will not be reading anyone yet.

Do not try to.

The reading comes in July, and the year between now and then is what makes it possible.

In Loving Light, Dr. Eleanor

Session 1 · Body Map, Not Body Graph

At the end of this session you can

State what the eight layers are, explain why one World is not enough, and name the five components of the Mandala of Synthesis®.

The thesis

Human Design maps one World. You live in four.

Beyond Human Design p.84. Living From Soul Ch.2 to 6.

Incomplete, not wrong. Two things are missing from the received system: the sleeping-mammal design calculation, and the Emotional/Angelic Matrix. Beyond Human Design p.2.

The Mandala of Synthesis®

Five components, and all five are needed.

1The Kabbalistic Tree of Life
2The Chakras
3Astrology
4The I Ching
5The critical stages of early human development

Astrology Essentials Part I, Illustration 5.

Where four comes from

One becomes two. Two becomes four.

Astrology Essentials Part III, Illustration 4.

The Four Worlds are derived rather than asserted, and that matters when you are explaining this to a colleague who has not seen it before.

Exercise · one you already know

Bring to mind one person you have worked with who did everything right and did not change.

Which World was the work done in?

Write here

Session 2 · Your Own Chart, Page by Page

At the end of this session you can

Read Design and Personality activations, gate and line notation, and every glyph, on your own chart.

What is on the page

DesignThe prenatal side of a layer
PersonalityThe postnatal side
NotationGate, then line. 34.2 is Gate 34, line 2
GlyphsThirteen. Ten planets, two Nodes, and Chiron

Human Design & Health, Personality and Design Calculations. Astrology Essentials Illustration 10.

Chiron

Chiron is in my charts and it is not in Human Design.

It reveals higher life purpose, karmic gifts, and the evolution of consciousness.

Cosmic Secrets pp.17 to 18.

Adding Chiron changes readings. In one chart it moved a prenatal Type from Projector to Generator.

Exercise · your own chart

Mark the Design and Personality columns on all eight layers.

Circle every glyph you cannot name. Bring the circles to the table.

Write here

Session 3 · The 88-Unit Rule

At the end of this session you can

Derive the eight windows from one rule and two rates of motion, name all eight layers, and tell eight layers from ten printed charts.

The rule

Eighty-eight units, before birth and after.

88 solar degreesprenatal and postnatal
88 solar minutesprenatal and postnatal
88 lunar degreesprenatal and postnatal
88 lunar minutesprenatal and postnatal

Science of Human Design p.5.

Minute means arcminute. One sixtieth of a degree. It is not a clock minute.

What that gives you

UnitWorks out toPrints on the chart as
88 solar degrees89.3 days3 month Solar
88 solar arcminutes1.49 days2 Day Solar Minute
88 lunar degrees6.68 days6 Day Lunar
88 lunar arcminutesabout 160 minutes90 minute Lunar Minute

The chart states one side. A World's full rhythm is both sides together.

Report Template Specification §5 and §7.

One of the four does not reconcile, and that is an open question rather than an error. Ninety minutes is also the length of one sleep cycle.

Exercise · derive it

You have the rule and the two rates. Work out the eight windows without looking them up.

Write here

Session 4 · The Five Types

At the end of this session you can

Name the five Types and their definitions, state the distribution, and determine your own Type in each of your eight layers.

The five

Manifestor · Generator · Manifesting Generator · Projector · Reflector

Human Design & Health, The Types.

The distribution

TypeShare
Generator36.8%
Manifesting Generator33.5%
Projector20.9%
Manifestor8.0%
Reflector0.9%

Science of Human Design Table 1.1 p.14, N = 5,000.

Type differs by layer

A person may be a Manifestor in one layer and a Generator in another.

Cosmic Secrets p.16.

In the Mental/Waking World alone, roughly 34 percent are Manifesting Generators. Across the Integrated Body Map, over 99 percent are.

Science of Human Design pp.5 and 84.

Two things follow from that. A Type read from one World is a Type read from an eighth of a person. And nearly everyone has more capacity to manifest than a single-World reading shows them.

Exercise · your own eight

Determine your Type in each of your eight layers.

Where does yours vary most, and what would that have looked like read from one World only?

Session 5 · The Nine Centers

At the end of this session you can

Name and locate all nine Centers, read definition across layers, and decline a medical inference without losing the person.

The nine

Head · Ajna · Throat · G/Self · Heart · Sacral · Splenic · Solar Plexus · Root

Human Design & Health, one figure per Center.

Definition

Four types: single, split, triple split, quadruple split. All four validated.

Beyond Human Design p.2.

Two findings that go together

Medical conditions occur independently of Center definition, and independently of Gate or line activation.

Beyond Human Design p.2.

Only the Mental/Waking and Physical/Biological Worlds carry the Solar Plexus.

Beyond Human Design p.88.

If you have trained in Human Design, the second one will read as an error. It is not. Emotional reactivity belongs to the two Worlds you operate in consciously and physically. The Emotional/Angelic World is feeling as intelligence rather than feeling as reaction.

And without integration of the Emotional/Angelic World, a person may not trust their intuitions. Beyond Human Design p.89. That is the mechanism behind knowing something and not acting on it.

Exercise · the question you will be asked

Your partner asks: does my undefined Throat mean I have thyroid problems?

Answer it. Out loud. Then write what you said.

Write here

Session 6 · What Is Not Interpreted

At the end of this session you can

Explain why neither Profile nor Lines carries an interpretation, name what replaces each, and decline to interpret either when a client asks.

Profile

Profile occurs at exactly the regularity the hexagram structure predicts. Frequency does not vary across populations.

So no interpretation can be inferred from it.

Science of Human Design p.4. Beyond Human Design p.1.

Lines

Lines are a mathematical artifact of the calculation.

The astrological sign together with its dwad, the undercurrent of nuanced meaning, yields more specific information than Lines do.

Human Design & Health p.124.

The dwad technique is not mine. Thyrza Escobar and Pamela Crane, credited in my own acknowledgements.

What both have in common

What is mathematically determined carries no information.

I do not subtract these things. I replace them.

Exercise · hold the finding

One of you plays a Human Design practitioner arguing for Profile.

The other holds the finding without dismissing the person.

Then swap.

What did you notice about doing it without dismissing them?

Session 7 · Patterns of Orientation

At the end of this session you can

Read a person's orientation from the Sun's Gate, across all six fields of the entry.

What replaces Profile

Statements for the Sun position, used instead of Profile.

Sixty-four entries, one per Gate. Each carries six fields.

1The trigram images
2The Foundation Pattern, with its variant
3The Transitional Pattern
4The Changing Pattern
5The I Ching hexagram name and keynote
6A plain-language statement

Sixteen Foundation Patterns, four variants each

Sphinx (Self-Knowledge) · ExplanationContagion (Transmission) · Sleeping Phoenix
Consciousness · PlanningEden · Rulership (Positioning)
Service · Vessel of LovePenetration · Tension
Laws · Maya (Illusion)Four Ways · Unexpected

Sixteen times four is sixty-four.

Six Pattern qualities: Adaptation · Introspection · Externalization · Universalization · Projection · Transition.

Exercise · read your own, out loud, to two people

Read your own orientation statement aloud.

The other two say whether it lands.

You are in the room, so you can correct them. That is the reason we work from your charts and not from strangers'.

What did they see that you had not?

Session 8 · The Astrology You Need

At the end of this session you can

Read a natal wheel, apply the four color rules, and explain to a client why birth time matters.

The wheel

Tropical, Placidus houses.

Signs, houses, rulerships, sign keynotes.

Astrology Essentials Parts II and IV.

Precision

Two minutes changes the Moon.

The Physical/Hormonal layer runs ninety minutes, so two minutes is over two percent of it.

Astrology Essentials Part V.

If a client does not know their birth time, that is information. Do not guess it for them.

The four color rules

#
1An astrological sign is colored by its sign at the 0° point
2The planetary ruler of a sign is colored by that sign
3A hexagram gate and line are colored by the color of that Gate's Center in the Body Graph
4A hexagram is colored by the sign of its lower trigram

A Basic Key to the Color Codes used in all Noble Sciences Documents, Astrology Essentials.

My colors carry information. A wrong color is a factual error rather than a style choice.

Exercise · your own wheel

Read your own natal wheel. Then color a supplied chart against the four rules.

Write here

Before You Leave

Gates 1 and 2 are assessed this afternoon.

Your dyad partner is assigned before you go.

Your reading pairs open next week. You will be reading each other on partial competence, deliberately, because that is how the nuances are learned.

Everything you need to look up is in the Reference Appendix at the back of this manual, and it is the same appendix in all three.

Notes

Notes

Notes

Reference Appendix

Everything a candidate looks up.

For: Students


Bound identically into all three intensive manuals.

Nothing here has to be remembered. Look it up.


HOW TO USE THIS

Every fact, table and finding a candidate needs across all three intensives is in these pages.

It is the same appendix in all three manuals, so nobody has to remember which volume something was in.

The Noble Energy® Principles at the front of each manual are a different kind of thing. Those are how a practitioner works. This is what is true, and what cannot be inferred.

Every entry cites its source. Where a source does not exist, the entry says so and stays blank.


1 · READING A CHART PAGE

DesignThe prenatal side of a layer
PersonalityThe postnatal side
NotationGate number, then line. 34.2 is Gate 34, line 2
GlyphsThirteen. The ten planets, the two Nodes, and Chiron

Chiron is in her charts and not in Human Design. It reveals higher life purpose, karmic gifts, and the evolution of consciousness. Cosmic Secrets pp.17 to 18.


2 · THE EIGHT LAYERS

Two per World. One before birth, one after.

#Layer, as printedWindowWorld
1Conscious Waking RealityCritical 3 month Prenatal SolarMental/Waking
2Spiritual & Dream (REM)Critical 6 Day Prenatal LunarSpiritual/Archetypal
3Emotional UnderlayCritical 2 Day Prenatal Solar MinuteEmotional/Angelic
4Physical/Hormonal UnderlayCritical 90 minute Prenatal Lunar MinutePhysical/Biological
5How we relate in the Interactive WorldCritical 3 month Postnatal SolarMental/Waking
6Spiritual Drive toward Expression in WorldCritical 6 Day Postnatal LunarSpiritual/Archetypal
7Emotional RelatingCritical 2 Day Postnatal Solar MinuteEmotional/Angelic
8Physical/Hormonal TimerCritical 90 minute Postnatal Lunar MinutePhysical/Biological

Source: Four Worlds Report Template Specification §7, and the layer names as printed on every chart.

Where the windows come from

One rule: 88 units, before birth and after. Science of Human Design p.5.

UnitComputes toPrinted as
88 solar degrees89.3 days3 month Solar
88 solar arcminutes1.49 days2 Day Solar Minute
88 lunar degrees6.68 days6 Day Lunar
88 lunar arcminutes~160 minutes90 minute Lunar Minute

Minute means arcminute, one sixtieth of a degree. Not a clock minute.

The chart states one side. A World's full rhythm is both sides together. So the Mental/Waking World runs on a six-month Solar rhythm, the Spiritual/Archetypal on a two-week Lunar, the Emotional/Angelic on a four-day Solar Minute, and the Physical/Biological on a three-hour Lunar Minute. Specification §5.

⚠ One exception, and it is an open question rather than an error. 88 lunar arcminutes computes to about 160 minutes. The layer prints as 90 minutes. Ninety minutes is also the length of one sleep cycle.


3 · EIGHT LAYERS, TEN PRINTED CHARTS

Printed chartWhat it is
Eight layer chartsOne per layer, above
Natal Integrated Vehicle · Approach to LifeCritical Prenatal 88 Degree period
Activated Integrated Vehicle · Response to LifeCritical Postnatal 88 Degree period

A third integrated view, Total, Manifesting Life, appears in the report. Specification §2.

So there are eight layers and ten printed charts, and the two words are not interchangeable.


4 · THE FOUR WORLD MATRICES

WorldWorld GateFactorCenters
Mental/Waking64Factor 1Ajna, Head
Spiritual/Archetypal15Factor 2Root, Sacral, Splenic
Emotional/Angelic33Factor 3Self, Throat, Sacral, Ajna, Crown
Physical/Biological25Factor 4Solar Plexus, Heart

World Gate means the single Gate that identifies that World. It is not the number of Gates in the World's matrix, and it is not a list of members.

Source: the Four World Matrices slide, and her ruling of 5 August 2026.

The matrix rule

Each World reads only the Gates of its own matrix.

A Channel forms only within a World whose matrix carries both of its Gates.

An activated Gate outside a World's matrix is read as a transit imprint, which is an unconscious predisposing perception rather than a defined energy. Specification §7.

⚠ SOURCE NEEDED · which Gates belong to which matrix. Four lists are required and do not yet exist in readable form. This page is complete except for them.

Dual membership

Ajna and Crown are a factor in their own right, and they also operate with the Sacral, the Self and the Throat. Her ruling, 5 August 2026.

The Sacral loads on two factors, at .619 and .469, and it is the bridge between the Spiritual/Archetypal and Emotional/Angelic Worlds. Science of Human Design p.77.

⚠ The Solar Plexus is not in the Emotional/Angelic World

This is one of her findings. It is not a mistake in the table above.

The Solar Plexus Center sits in the Physical/Biological and Mental/Waking Worlds. It does not sit in the Emotional/Angelic World. Beyond Human Design p.88.

If you have trained in Human Design you were taught that the Solar Plexus is the emotional center, so this will read as an error the first time you see it. It is not.

Her position is that emotional reactivity belongs to the two Worlds a person operates in consciously and physically, and that the Emotional/Angelic World is feeling as intelligence rather than feeling as reaction.

And a consequence worth holding. Without integration of the Emotional/Angelic World, a person may not trust their intuitions. Beyond Human Design p.89. That is the mechanism behind knowing something and not acting on it.


5 · THE NINE CENTERS

Head · Ajna · Throat · G/Self · Heart · Sacral · Splenic · Solar Plexus · Root

One figure per Center in Human Design & Health.

Only the Mental/Waking and Physical/Biological Worlds carry the Solar Plexus. Beyond Human Design p.88.

Definition types: single, split, triple split, quadruple split. All four validated. Beyond Human Design p.2.


6 · THE FIVE TYPES

TypeShare of population
Generator36.8%
Manifesting Generator33.5%
Projector20.9%
Manifestor8.0%
Reflector0.9%

Science of Human Design Table 1.1 p.14, N = 5,000.

Type differs by layer. A person may be a Manifestor in one layer and a Generator in another. Cosmic Secrets p.16.

In the Mental/Waking World alone, roughly 34% are Manifesting Generators. Across the Integrated Body Map, over 99% are. Science of Human Design pp.5 and 84.


7 · PATTERNS OF ORIENTATION

Read from the Sun's Gate. Used instead of Profile.

Sixteen Foundation Patterns, two per page across eight pages, four variants each. Sixteen times four is sixty-four.

PageFoundation Patterns
1Sphinx (Self-Knowledge) · Explanation
2Contagion (Transmission) · Sleeping Phoenix
3Consciousness · Planning
4Eden · Rulership (Positioning)
5Service · Vessel of Love
6Penetration · Tension
7Laws · Maya (Illusion)
8Four Ways · Unexpected

Verified against the Patterns of Orientation workbook.

Each of the sixty-four entries carries three tiers: a Foundation Pattern, a Transitional Pattern and a Changing Pattern. Plus the trigram images, the I Ching hexagram name and keynote, and a plain-language statement.

Six Pattern qualities: Adaptation · Introspection · Externalization · Universalization · Projection · Transition. Specification §5.

⚠ Two open items. The charts label every Pattern a Foundation Pattern while the workbook distinguishes three tiers. And the eight-page source that explains the sixteen Patterns has not been located.


8 · CHANNEL PRIORITY

Forty-one entries. Thirty-six standard Channels and five composite Integration Channels.

Read top to bottom. Rank 1 is highest priority.

1 · 10-57-34-202 · 10-34-203 · 20-57-344 · 20-345 · 10-57-34
6 · 10-347 · 5-158 · 27-509 · 2-1410 · 29-46
11 · 21-4512 · 12-2213 · 18-5814 · 16-4815 · 7-31
16 · 32-5417 · 1-818 · 13-3319 · 37-4020 · 6-59
21 · 9-5222 · 3-6023 · 42-5324 · 26-4425 · 34-57
26 · 10-5727 · 10-2028 · 28-3829 · 19-4930 · 20-57
31 · 23-4332 · 10-57-2033 · 11-5634 · 17-6235 · 35-36
36 · 24-6137 · 4-6338 · 47-6439 · 39-5540 · 25-51
41 · 30-41

Verified against Channel Priorities, columns D and E.

Two things to know about this table

The top six are all composite Integration Channels. Channels that complete only across layers or only in integration are frequently a person's highest priority energies. Specification §7.

Frequency is not priority. Channel 30-41 appears in all eight layers of the eclipse chart and ranks forty-one of forty-one. Her own worked example. It is the most common mistake a self-taught reader makes.


9 · THE COLOR KEY

Her colors carry information. A wrong color is a factual error, not a style choice.

Four coding rules. A Basic Key to the Color Codes used in all Noble Sciences Documents, Astrology Essentials.

#Rule
1An astrological sign is colored by its sign at the 0° point
2The planetary ruler of a sign is colored by that sign
3A hexagram gate and line are colored by the color of that Gate's Center in the Body Graph
4A hexagram is colored by the sign of its lower trigram

⚠ The World colors are provisional. Her published key colors signs, Centers and trigrams. It does not color Worlds. Three different palettes exist and none is authoritative. Awaiting her ruling. Do not treat any World hex as final.


10 · WHAT IS TRUE ABOUT A PERSON

Her findings, stated positively.

Source
Human Design maps only the Mental/Waking World. Incomplete, not wrongBeyond Human Design p.84
You were complete by the time you were three months old, with your spiritual essence fully anchored in your beingLiving From Soul p.7
Only the Mental/Waking and Physical/Biological Worlds carry the Solar PlexusBeyond Human Design p.88
Without integration of the Emotional/Angelic World, a person may not trust their intuitionsBeyond Human Design p.89
While dreaming, all 64 Gates are activated, creating a portal that allows us to receive communication from the unified integrated field of consciousnessCosmic Secrets p.13
Not all information is available to you in each World all the timeStep Over The Threshold, Day 5

11 · WHAT CANNOT BE INFERRED

Her negative findings. Each one is something a practitioner declines to do.

Source
Profile occurs at exactly the regularity the hexagram structure predicts, so no interpretation can be inferred from itScience of Human Design p.4 · Beyond Human Design p.1
Lines are a mathematical artifact. The sign with its dwad yields more specific informationHuman Design & Health p.124
Medical conditions occur independently of Center definition, and independently of Gate or line activationBeyond Human Design p.2
Projectors do not need to wait for outside recognitionScience of Human Design p.17
Reflectors need the Four Worlds approachScience of Human Design pp.17 to 18

12 · GLOSSARY

Terms that mean something specific here.

TermMeaning
Body MapHers. The eight layers together. Not the Body Graph, which is one World
PortalA Gate that connects to a different World. Beyond Human Design p.3. ⚠ In the Triple Design Matrix, 2000, the same word means a Gate connecting the three Realms of the DreamRave. The 2024 meaning is current
Solar Minute · Lunar MinuteArcminutes of solar or lunar motion in the 88-unit calculation. Not clock minutes
Transit imprintAn activated Gate outside a World's matrix. An unconscious predisposing perception
DwadThe 2.5° division of a sign, twelve per sign. Technique credited to Thyrza Escobar and Pamela Crane in her own acknowledgements
SuperdwadThe division below the dwad. Credited in her acknowledgements and described nowhere. SOURCE NEEDED
Know · KnowingCapitalized. Direct knowing, not inference. She will sometimes decline to consult a chart because she already Knows
MatricesHer term for the four World gate sets
Mandala of Synthesis®Her core diagram. Tree of Life, Chakras, Astrology, the I Ching, and the critical stages of early human development

13 · ATTRIBUTIONS

Not everything in this program is hers, and the ones that are not are named.

WhatWhose
Clean Language, Clean Questions, Clean SpaceDavid Grove
The dwad technique, and superdwadsThyrza Escobar · Pamela Crane
Acknowledgment rather than understandingBrugh Joy
Want for approval, want for controlLester Levenson
The color system's traditionThe Golden Dawn, per her own note

End of appendix. Identical in all three manuals.